Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                
Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 184

front.

fm Page i Thursday, October 24, 2002 7:52 AM

V-MAC® III
Support Software
for Windows® 95/98/ME/NT/
2000/XP User’s Guide
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

V-MAC® III is a registered trademark of Mack Trucks, Inc.

Revised — November 2002 ELECTRICAL 8-341


© Copyright 2002, Mack Trucks, Inc.

Page i
front.fm Page ii Wednesday, October 23, 2002 12:57 PM

ATTENTION
The information in this manual is not all inclusive and
cannot take into account all unique situations. Note that
some illustrations are typical and may not reflect the
exact arrangement of every component installed on a
specific chassis.
The information, specifications, and illustrations in this
publication are based on information that was current at
the time of publication.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or be transmitted in any form by any
means including (but not limited to) electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise
without prior written permission of Mack Trucks, Inc.

Page ii
safety.fm Page iii Wednesday, October 23, 2002 12:59 PM

SAFETY INFORMATION

SAFETY INFORMATION

Page iii
safety.fm Page iv Wednesday, October 23, 2002 12:59 PM

SAFETY INFORMATION
SAFETY INFORMATION
Advisory Labels
Cautionary signal words (Danger-Warning-Caution) may appear in various locations throughout this
manual. Information accented by one of these signal words must be observed to minimize the risk of
personal injury to service personnel, or the possibility of improper service methods which may damage
the vehicle or cause it to be unsafe. Additional Notes and Service Hints are used to emphasize areas of
procedural importance and provide suggestions for ease of repair. The following definitions indicate the
use of these advisory labels as they appear throughout the manual:

Activities associated with Danger indicate that death or serious personal


injury may result from failing to heed the advisory. Serious personal injury
may be equated to career-ending injury.

Activities associated with Warning indicate that personal injury may result
from failing to heed the advisory. In this case, personal injury is not equated to
career-ending injury, but results in possible change in quality of life.

Activities associated with Caution indicate that product damage may result from
failing to heed the advisory. Caution is not used for personal injury.

A procedure, practice, or condition that is essential to emphasize.

A helpful suggestion that will make it quicker and/or easier to perform a procedure,
while possibly reducing service cost.

Page iv
safety.fm Page v Wednesday, October 23, 2002 12:59 PM

SAFETY INFORMATION
Service Procedures and Tool Usage
Anyone using a service procedure or tool not recommended in this manual must first satisfy himself
thoroughly that neither his safety nor vehicle safety will be jeopardized by the service method he selects.
Individuals deviating in any manner from the instructions provided assume all risks of consequential
personal injury or damage to equipment involved.

Also note that particular service procedures may require the use of a special tool(s) designed for a
specific purpose. These special tools must be used in the manner described, whenever specified in the
instructions.

1. Before starting a vehicle, always be seated in the driver’s seat, place the
transmission in neutral, be sure that parking brakes are set, and
disengage the clutch.
2. Before working on a vehicle, place the transmission in neutral, set the
parking brakes, and block the wheels.
3. Before towing the vehicle, place the transmission in neutral and lift the
rear wheels off the ground, or disconnect the driveline to avoid damage to
the transmission during towing.

Engine-driven components such as Power Take-Off (PTO) units, fans and fan
belts, driveshafts and other related rotating assemblies, can be very
dangerous. Do not work on or service engine-driven components unless the
engine is shut down. Always keep body parts and loose clothing out of range
of these powerful components to prevent serious personal injury. Be aware of
PTO engagement or nonengagement status. Always disengage the PTO when
not in use.

Do not work under a vehicle that is supported only by a hydraulic jack. The
hydraulic jack could fail suddenly and unexpectedly, resulting in severe
personal injury or death. Always use jackstands of adequate capacity to
support the weight of the vehicle.

REMEMBER,
SAFETY . . . IS NO ACCIDENT!

Page v
safety.fm Page vi Wednesday, October 23, 2002 12:59 PM

SAFETY INFORMATION
Mack Trucks, Inc. cannot anticipate every r Use hoists or jacks to lift or move heavy
possible occurrence that may involve a potential objects.
hazard. Accidents can be avoided by recognizing
r NEVER run engine indoors unless exhaust
potentially hazardous situations and taking
fumes are adequately vented to the outside.
necessary precautions. Performing service
procedures correctly is critical to technician safety r Be aware of hot surfaces. Allow engine to
and safe, reliable vehicle operation. cool sufficiently before performing any
service or tests in the vicinity of the engine.
The following list of general shop safety practices
r Keep work area clean and orderly. Clean up
can help technicians avoid potentially hazardous
any spilled oil, grease, fuel, hydraulic fluid,
situations and reduce the risk of personal injury.
etc.
DO NOT perform any services, maintenance
procedures or lubrications until this manual has r Only use tools that are in good condition,
been read and understood. and always use accurately calibrated torque
wrenches to tighten all fasteners to specified
r Perform all service work on a flat, level
torques. In instances where procedures
surface. Block wheels to prevent vehicle
require the use of special tools which are
from rolling.
designed for a specific purpose, use only in
r DO NOT wear loose-fitting or torn clothing. the manner described in the instructions.
Remove any jewelry before servicing
r Do not store natural gas powered vehicles
vehicle.
indoors for an extended period of time
r ALWAYS wear safety glasses and protective (overnight) without first removing the fuel.
shoes. Avoid injury by being aware of sharp
r Never smoke around a natural gas powered
corners and jagged edges.
vehicle.

Page vi
toc.fm Page vii Wednesday, October 23, 2002 12:59 PM

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page vii
toc.fm Page viii Wednesday, October 23, 2002 12:59 PM

TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS MANUAL Programming History Display Screen ............ 20
Switch Status Display Screen ........................ 21
INTRODUCTION TO V-MAC® SUPPORT
Vehicle Data Log Display Screen ................... 21
SOFTWARE ....................................................... 2
Maintenance Data Log Display Screen .......... 21
Software Organization ...................................... 2
Enable Predictive Oil Change Pop-Up
Online Help Function ...................................... 2
Screen ............................................................ 22
Software Distribution ........................................ 2
Adaptive Cruise Control Screen ..................... 23
User’s Guide Organization ............................... 2
Fault Reporter Configuration Screen .............. 23
V-MAC II User’s Information ........................... 2
Fault Reporter Advanced Setup Screen ......... 24
Chassis Dyno Mode Display Screen .............. 24
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Cylinder Cut-Out Test Display Screen ........... 25
Engine Run-Up Test Screen .......................... 25
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
Engine Compression Test Screen .................. 26
INTRODUCTION ................................................ 4
Engine Brake Test Screen ............................. 26
About Installation .............................................. 4
Installation Requirements ................................. 4 Wiggle Wire Test Screen ................................ 27
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DESCRIPTION Cylinder Balance Test .................................... 28
AND OPERATION .............................................. 4 VGT Vane Position Calibration Test ............... 28
Installing V-MAC Support Software .................. 4 Cummins Screen Summaries .......................... 29
Connecting the Computer to the Vehicle ......... 6 SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS DESCRIPTION AND
Using the Serial Link Adapter ......................... 6 OPERATION ...................................................... 33
Accessing V-MAC Support Software ............... 6 Active Faults While Monitoring List ............ 33
Using the Start Menu ...................................... 6 Calibrate Throttle Pedal .............................. 33
Configuring the Software .................................. 6 Capturing Display Screen Snapshots ........ 33
Software Configuration Fields ........................ 7 Changing Engine Idle Speed ..................... 33
Exiting V-MAC Support Software ..................... 7 Changing the Governor Type .................... 34
Uninstalling V-MAC Software ........................... 7 Chassis DYNO Mode ................................ 34
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION SPECIAL TOOLS Clearing Current Selections ....................... 34
AND EQUIPMENT ............................................. 8 Clearing Fault Tables ................................ 34
Hardware Requirements .................................. 8 Cylinder Balance Test ................................ 35
Communication Interface ................................. 9 Cylinder Cut-Out Test ................................ 35
Serial Link Adapter ......................................... 9 Default Display Settings ............................ 35
Engine Brake Test ...................................... 35
Engine Compression Test .......................... 36
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS Engine Run-Up Test ................................... 36
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS INTRODUCTION ..... 12 Fault Monitoring During
About Service Diagnostics ............................... 12 Live Parameter Monitoring ...................... 36
Accessing Service Diagnostics ........................ 12 Fault Reporter............................................. 36
Online Help Function ........................................ 12 Fault Reporter Advanced Setup ................. 37
Additional Information ...................................... 12 Fault Reporter Configuration ...................... 37
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS VISUAL Live Parameter Monitoring ........................ 37
IDENTIFICATION ............................................... 12 Parameter Selection
Screen Summaries ........................................... 12 Using Default Selections ......................... 37
Service Diagnostics Menu .............................. 12 Using SAE Parameter Menu ................... 37
SAE Parameter Menu Selection Screen ........ 13 Paused Parameter Monitoring ................... 38
Fault Codes Menu .......................................... 13 Predictive Oil Change ................................. 38
Diagnostic Tools Menu ................................... 14 Printing Display Screen Snapshots ........... 38
Special Diagnostic Modes Menu .................... 14 Printing Fault Tables .................................. 38
Utilities Menu .................................................. 16 Resetting the Maintenance Data Log ........ 39
Parameter Monitoring Display Screens .......... 16 Resetting the Vehicle Data Log ................. 39
All Active Faults Display Screen ..................... 17 Saving Default Selections .......................... 39
Controller Fault Table Display Screen ............ 17 Saving Parameter Defaults ........................ 39
Fault Reporter Screen .................................... 18 Saving the Maintenance Data Log ............ 39
Clearing Fault Reporter .................................. 19 Saving the Vehicle Data Log ..................... 39
Fault Reporter Log Items ................................ 19 Selecting Datalink Adapter ......................... 40
Vehicle Information Display Screen ............... 20 VGT Vane Position Calibration ................... 40

Page viii
toc.fm Page ix Wednesday, October 23, 2002 12:59 PM

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Viewing Active Faults ................................. 40 Fleet Driver Event Settings Entry Form .......... 60
Viewing Adaptive Cruise Control Status .... 41 Incident Log Filter and Trigger Settings
Viewing Display Screen Snapshots ........... 41 Entry Form ...................................................... 61
Viewing Electronic Configuration Maintenance Customer Defined Labels
Information ............................................... 41 Entry Form ...................................................... 61
Viewing Fault Tables .................................. 41 Driver ID Settings Entry Form ......................... 61
Viewing Programming Histories ................. 41 Cummins Screen Summaries ........................... 62
Viewing the Maintenance Data Log ........... 42 CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
Viewing the Switch Status Display ............. 42 DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION .................... 63
Viewing the Vehicle Data Log .................... 42 Theft Deterrence System Summary ................. 63
Wiggle Wire Test......................................... 43 Security Modes ............................................... 63
DataMax™ Summary Information .................... 45 Access Level Restrictions ............................... 63
Maintenance Monitor Summary ........................ 64
Programming Maintenance Intervals .............. 64
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING Monitoring Maintenance Thresholds ............... 64
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING Broadcasting Maintenance Alerts ................... 64
INTRODUCTION ................................................ 50 Customer Data Programming Functions.......... 65
About Customer Data Programming ................ 50 Edit Owner Storage .................................... 65
Accessing Customer Data Programming .......... 50 Maintenance Monitor Schedule .................. 65
Online Help Function ........................................ 50 Unit Pump Calibration ................................. 65
Additional Information ....................................... 50 Set Time and Date ..................................... 65
Password Protection ......................................... 50 Print Current Parameters ........................... 65
Entering the Password .................................... 50 View Current Parameters ........................... 65
Changing the Password .................................. 51 Utilities......................................................... 66
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING VISUAL Vehicle Component Parameters ....................... 66
IDENTIFICATION ............................................... 51 Unit ID Number .......................................... 66
Screen Summaries ........................................... 51 Transmission Top Gear Ratio .................... 66
Customer Data Programming Menu ............... 51 Carrier Ratio ............................................... 66
View/Print Report Selection Screen ................ 52 Tire Size ..................................................... 66
Program Vehicle Component Parameters Road Speed Pickup Teeth ......................... 67
Entry Form ...................................................... 53 Road Speed Limit ....................................... 67
Vehicle ECU Customer Data Menu ................ 53 Lower Gear Road Speed Limit ................... 67
Engine ECU Customer Data Entry Form ........ 54 Engine Load Threshold for No
Fleet Data Menu ............................................. 54 MPH Signal .............................................. 67
Edit Owner Storage Entry Form ...................... 55 Failed MPH Sensor Engine
Maintenance Monitor Entry Form .................... 55 Power Limit .............................................. 68
Unit Pump Calibration Entry Form .................. 56 Battery Low Voltage Fault Threshold ......... 68
Set Time and Date Screen .............................. 56 Alternator Low Voltage Fault Threshold ..... 68
Preferences Entry Form .................................. 57 Alternator High Voltage Fault Threshold .... 68
General Features Entry Form ......................... 57 Enable Cruise Button Bonus ...................... 68
Shutdown Options Entry Form ........................ 57 Detect Loss of Signal from
Vocational Features Entry Form ..................... 58 MPH Sensor ............................................. 69
Cab Fan Controls Entry Form ......................... 58 Limit Power if No Signal from
Cruise Control Options Entry Form ................. 58 MPH Sensor ............................................. 69
Electronic Hand Throttle Settings Limit Power if Electrical Fault from
Entry Form ...................................................... 59 MPH Sensor ............................................. 69
PTO Speed Control Settings Entry Form ........ 59 Customer Torque Limit................................ 69
PTO 1-2 Custom Settings Entry Form ............ 59 Customer Torque Limit Gear Ratio ............. 69
PTO 3-4 Custom Settings Entry Form ............ 60 Torque Limit Ramp-Up Time....................... 70
Theft Deterrence Parameters Entry Form ....... 60 Disable Torque Limit with PTO ................... 70
Fleet Display and Trip Parameters Enable if Fault Incorrect Gear Ratio............ 70
Entry Form ...................................................... 60

Page ix
toc.fm Page x Wednesday, October 23, 2002 12:59 PM

TABLE OF CONTENTS
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING (CONTINUED)
Customer Data/VECU Allow Fan Override When Parked ............. 81
General Features .......................................... 71 Engage Fan with Engine Brake ................. 82
Lower Gear Road Speed Limit Option ....... 71 Engage Fan with PTO ON .......................... 82
Delay Engine Brake Application Cruise Control Features ................................ 83
in Cruise .................................................. 71 Cruise Control Mode................................... 83
Low Idle Speed Adjust with Switches ........ 71 Disable Cruise Control................................ 83
Hold Electrical Power ON Until Autoresume with Clutch.............................. 83
Vehicle Stopped ...................................... 71 Accel Bump Speed .................................... 83
Engine Sleep Mode Alert ........................... 71 Decel Bump Speed .................................... 83
Fuel Economy Type ................................... 72 Hold to Nearest .......................................... 84
Cruise Switch Disables Super 10 Cruise Min Road Speed ............................ 84
Top 2 ....................................................... 72 Cruise Max Road Speed ........................... 84
Engine Overspeed Fault Threshold ........... 72 Bump Speed .............................................. 84
Service Brake Fault Threshold with Engagement and Dropout Requirements .. 85
Engine Brake ........................................... 72 Electronic Hand Throttle (EHT) Features .......... 85
Shutdown Options .......................................... 73 Enable Custom EHT Control ..................... 85
Coolant Temperature ................................. 73 Autoset ...................................................... 85
Oil Pressure ............................................... 73 Jump to Min Speed .................................... 85
Coolant Level ............................................. 73 Single Speed Control (SSC) ...................... 85
Automatic Transmission Temperature Hold to Minimum Speed ............................ 86
Warning and Shutdown ........................... 73 Dropout Above Maximum Speed ............... 86
Transmission Temperature ........................ 74 Electronic Hand Throttle SSC RPM ........... 86
Exhaust Temperature ................................ 74 Accel Bump Speed .................................... 86
Idle Cooldown Feature Enabled ................. 74 Decel Bump Speed .................................... 86
Idle Shutdown ............................................. 75 Hold to Nearest .......................................... 87
Idle Shutdown if PTO Active ...................... 75 Accel Ramp Rate ....................................... 87
Idle Shutdown if Single Speed Control Decel Ramp Rate ...................................... 87
Active ....................................................... 75 Min Set Speed ........................................... 87
Idle Shutdown if % Load Used Higher Max Set Speed .......................................... 87
Than Threshold ....................................... 75 Engine Speed Limit ................................... 88
Idle Shutdown if Hand Throttle Control Max Road Speed ....................................... 88
Active ....................................................... 75 Ramp Rate ................................................ 88
Idle Shutdown if in Sleeper Mode .............. 76 Engagement and Dropout
Idle Shutdown if in Sleeper Mode with Requirements .......................................... 88
PTO 4 Fast Idle ....................................... 76 PTO Speed Control Settings ......................... 89
Ambient Air Temperature Option ................ 77 Single Speed Control (SSC) ...................... 89
Minimum Ambient Air Temperature ............ 77 Park Brake Check to Enable PTO ............. 89
Maximum Ambient Air Temperature ........... 77 Min Set Speed ........................................... 89
Idle Shutdown Timer .................................. 78 Max Set Speed .......................................... 89
Idle Shutdown Warm-Up Timer ................. 78 Max Road Speed Dropout .......................... 89
Idle Shutdown Warm-Up Temperature ...... 78 Engine Speed Limit ................................... 90
Idle Shutdown Warning Time .................... 78 Preset Speed ............................................. 90
Idle Shutdown % Load Threshold .............. 79 Ramp Rate ................................................ 90
Vocational Features ...................................... 79 Road Speed Limit ....................................... 90
Set/Resume Switch State .......................... 79 Custom PTO Settings .................................... 91
Inhibit Cruise Control with PTO ON ........... 79 Autoset ...................................................... 91
Single Press of Resume to Accelerate ...... 79 Jump to Minimum Speed ........................... 91
Initial Set using Resume Switch ................ 79 Hold to Minimum Speed ............................ 91
Driveshaft PTO 2 Option ............................ 79 Dropout Above Maximum Speed ............... 91
Set/Resume Fault Diagnostic ..................... 80 Accel Bump Speed .................................... 91
Switch Assignments .................................. 80 Decel Bump Speed .................................... 92
Cab Fan Controls ......................................... 81 Hold to Nearest .......................................... 92
Allow Fan Override When Moving ............. 81 Accel Ramp Rate ....................................... 92
Fan Override Time When Moving .............. 81 Decel Ramp Rate ...................................... 92

Page x
toc.fm Page xi Wednesday, October 23, 2002 12:59 PM

TABLE OF CONTENTS
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING (CONTINUED)
Engagement and Dropout Programming Options
Requirements ........................................... 93 via V.I.P.™ ................................................ 102
Customer Data/EECU Features ....................... 94 Reset Predictive Oil Change via
High Idle Engine Speed ............................. 94 Override Switch......................................... 104
Coolant Temperature Fan Engagement GuardDog™ Enabled.................................. 105
Threshold ................................................. 94 GuardDog™ Low Fuel Level Warn.
Air Temp. Fan Engagement Threshold ...... 94 Thresh. % ................................................. 105
Air Conditioning Override Time .................. 94 Fleet Fuel Economy Target ........................ 105
Engine Sleep Mode .................................... 95 Data Save Mode ........................................ 106
Smart Fan Type Installed ............................ 95 Idle Data Type on V.I.P.™ ......................... 106
Driveshaft PTO Dropout Enabled ............... 95 Request Driver Name at Every
Driveshaft PTO Dropout Threshold ............ 96 Startup? ................................................... 106
Fuel Temperature Sensor Applied ............. 96 Source of Driver Name for Trip .................. 106
Oil Level Sensor Available ......................... 96 Length of Driver Trip Code ......................... 107
Output Boost Pressure on Maintenance Broadcast Schedule ............. 107
J1587 ....................................................... 96 Blackout Mode Enabled ............................. 107
Engine Brake Installed ............................... 96 Alert Blackout Start Time, GMT ................. 107
MACK PowerLeash™ Engine Brake Alert Blackout Stop Time, GMT .................. 107
Installed..................................................... 96 Engine Overspeed, Company Limit ........... 108
Exhaust Brake Installed ............................. 97 Engine Overspeed Logging (Severe) ......... 108
Oil Temperature Sensor Available ............. 97 Engine Overspeed Logging with Fuel ........ 108
Air Conditioning Installed Option................. 97 Vehicle Overspeed Logging with Fuel ........ 108
Fuel Calibration .......................................... 98 Vehicle Overspeed Logging,
Fleet Data All Conditions ........................................... 108
Theft Deterrence Features ............................. 98 Idle Logging Delay ..................................... 108
Number of ID Attempts ............................... 98 Hard Braking Threshold ............................. 109
Demand Driver ID to Operate .................... 98 Traction Loss Threshold ............................. 109
Limited Power: % Power Limit if No ID Custom Parameters ................................... 109
Entered .................................................... 98 Driver Event Settings ..................................... 109
Demand ID to Continue Running Beyond Write Report Once per Day ........................ 109
30 Seconds .............................................. 98 Write Report When Key Turned ON ........... 109
Limited Time: % Power Limit Before Write Report at Next Trip/Trip Reset .......... 110
Shutdown ................................................. 98 Driver Event Summary Time ...................... 110
Distance Before Shutdown ......................... 99 Trigger: PTO 1 Enabled ............................. 110
Distance Remaining After Shutdown Trigger: PTO 2 Enabled ............................. 110
Lamp ON................................................... 99 Trigger: Fueled Engine Speed ................... 110
Time Before Shutdown ............................... 99 Trigger: Severe Engine Speed ................... 110
% Mechanic Power Limit ............................ 99 Trigger: Company Limit Engine Speed ...... 111
Mechanic Road Speed Limit ...................... 99 Trigger: Fueled Vehicle Overspeed ........... 111
Display and Trip Settings ............................... 100 Trigger: Vehicle Overspeed ....................... 111
Vehicle Display Type .................................. 100 Driver Event Summary List ........................ 111
Advance to Next Trip via Display ............... 100 Incident Log Filter and Trigger Settings ......... 111
Reset DataMax™ via V.I.P.™ .................... 100 Customer Defined Labels .............................. 114
Driver Reset Maintenance Driver ID Settings ........................................... 114
Items via V.I.P.™ ..................................... 100 Determining Actual Fuel Consumed ............... 115
Reset Driver Trip via V.I.P.™ ..................... 101
Display Trip Information on V.I.P.™ ........... 101
Disable Sweet Spot..................................... 101

Page xi
toc.fm Page xii Wednesday, October 23, 2002 12:59 PM

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DEALER PROGRAMMING REVIEW DEALER PROGRAMMING
PHASES ............................................................. 137
Introduction ...................................................... 118
Product Software Programming ....................... 137
Accessing Dealer Programming Software ...... 118
Data File Programming .................................... 137
Online Help Function ...................................... 118
PUTTING IT ALL TOGETHER ........................... 138
Additional Information ..................................... 118
Step 1 — Find Vehicle Information
DEALER GENERAL PROGRAMMING
(for VECU) ........................................................ 138
INFORMATION .................................................. 118
Step 2 — Save Customer Data (for VECU) ..... 138
Electronic Control Unit (ECU) .......................... 118
Step 3 — Download Product Software File
V-MAC III Configuration ................................... 118
(for VECU) ........................................................ 139
V-MAC II Configuration .................................... 119
Step 4 — Download Datafile (for VECU) ......... 139
Dealer Programming File Nomenclature .......... 121
Step 5 — Program (Flash) VECU .................... 140
The Data File Extension ................................. 121
Step 6 — Program VECU ................................ 140
V-MAC Dealer Programming Phases .............. 122
Step 7 — Upload Verification File .................... 141
Product Software Programming (PSP) ........... 122
Step 8 — View MACK Host Vehicle Information
Data File Programming (MDP) ....................... 122
Screen .............................................................. 141
DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS ................... 142
COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS ......................... 122
Overview of Basic Programming Steps ............ 142
DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
Step 1 — Determining the Programming
VISUAL IDENTIFICATION ................................. 123
Type ............................................................... 142
V-MAC Online Screen Summaries ................... 123
Step 2 — Identifying the Appropriate
MACKnet LOG ON SCREEN ......................... 123
Worksheet ...................................................... 143
V-MAC Online Main Screen ........................... 123
Step 3 — Performing Programming
System Type Vehicle Information Screen ...... 124
Procedures ..................................................... 144
Product Software Download Entry Form ........ 124
Detailed Programming Instructions .................. 145
Datafile Entry Form ........................................ 125
Removing Fuses ............................................ 145
Verification Upload Entry Form ...................... 125
Clearing Fault Tables ..................................... 145
Mack Trucks Host Menu ................................. 126
Saving Customer Data ................................... 145
F1 — Administrative/customer Information
Re-Entering Customer Passwords ................. 145
by GSO/Chassis or VIN Entry Form ............... 127
Programming the Reprogramming Data File .. 146
F3 — Update Options Form ........................... 127
Changing the ECU Part Number .................... 146
F5 — Update Calibration Codes
Using the F3 Update Options Screen ............. 147
Entry Form ...................................................... 127
Downloading the Product Software File ......... 147
F9 — EECU Part Number Change
Downloading the Reprogramming
Entry Form ...................................................... 129
Data File ......................................................... 147
F11 — VECU Part Number Change
Uploading the Verification File ........................ 148
Entry Form ...................................................... 129
Downloading the Product Software
F19 — Add VIN/GSO/Chassis Entry Form ..... 130
V.I.P.™ File .................................................... 148
F20 — Install Engine Entry Form ................... 130
Recalibrating the EUPs .................................. 148
Dealer Programming Software Screen
Programming the Product Software File ........ 148
Summaries ....................................................... 131
Programming Worksheets ................................ 149
V-MAC Dealer Programming Menu ................ 131
TYPE 1 — VECU ........................................... 149
V-MAC Navigator Bar ..................................... 131
TYPE 1 — EECU ........................................... 149
Programming Bar ........................................... 132
TYPE 1 — BOTH ECUs ................................. 150
Utilities Bar ..................................................... 132
TYPE 2 — VECU ........................................... 150
MACK Data Programming Entry Form ........... 133
TYPE 2 — EECU ........................................... 151
Save Customer Data Entry Form ................... 134
TYPE 2 — BOTH ECUs ................................. 151
Preferences Entry Form ................................. 134
TYPE 3 — VECU ........................................... 152
Product Software (Flash) Programming
TYPE 3 — EECU ........................................... 152
Entry Form ...................................................... 136
TYPE 3 — BOTH ECUs ................................. 153
V.I.P.™ Product Software (Flash)
TYPE 4 — VECU ........................................... 153
Programming
TYPE 4 — EECU ........................................... 154
Entry Form ...................................................... 136
TYPE 4 — BOTH ECUs ................................. 154
Using V-MAC Online and Dealer
TYPE 5 (EECU ONLY) ................................... 155
Programming ...................................................... 137

Page xii
toc.fm Page xiii Wednesday, October 23, 2002 12:59 PM

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TYPE 6 — VECU ............................................ 155
TYPE 6 — EECU ............................................ 156
TYPE 6 — BOTH ECUs .................................. 156
TYPE 7 — VECU ............................................ 157
TYPE 7 — EECU ............................................ 157
TYPE 7 — BOTH ECUs .................................. 158
TYPE 7 — V.I.P.™ .......................................... 158
TYPE 8 — VECU ............................................ 159
TYPE 8 — EECU ............................................ 159
TYPE 8 — BOTH ECUs .................................. 160
TYPE 9 — CDS-EXT ...................................... 160

APPENDIX ...................................................... 161


CUSTOM DEFINED STATEMENTS .................. 162

GLOSSARY .................................................... 165


TECHNICAL TERMINOLOGY ............................ 166
Software Terminology ....................................... 166
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................... 166

FEATURE INDEX ......................................... 167

Page xiii
toc.fm Page xiv Wednesday, October 23, 2002 12:59 PM

NOTES

Page xiv
8_341.bk Page 1 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Page 1
8_341.bk Page 2 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

ABOUT THIS MANUAL


INTRODUCTION TO V-MAC® The SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS section provides
screen summaries, feature descriptions and
SUPPORT SOFTWARE programming information for the SERVICE
DIAGNOSTICS program.
Software Organization
The CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
This version of V-MAC support software is made section provides screen summaries, feature
up of two separate applications. descriptions and programming information for the
r Service Support Software consists of two FLEET DATA and CUSTOMER DATA
programs: PROGRAMMING program.
— SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS The DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
— CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING section provides screen summaries and
programming information for the DEALER
r Dealer Programming Software consists of PROGRAMMING program and V-MAC Online
one program (DEALER PROGRAMMING) web-based software, as well as programming
that incorporates all functions contained in instructions and worksheets for reprogramming
DATA PROGRAMMING and PRODUCT and reflashing the Electronic Control Units
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING. (ECUs) and the Vehicle Information Profiler
(V.I.P.™), version 3.0.

The APPENDIX section provides additional


These two applications (Service Support information concerning Custom Defined
Software and Dealer Programming Software) are Statements (CDS).
available by software download from the MACK
Extranet and as a single CD-ROM that must be The GLOSSARY section provides definitions for
set up in two different directories. commonly used V-MAC terms and abbreviations.

The FEATURE INDEX section provides a


ONLINE HELP FUNCTION comprehensive index of V-MAC features.
Each of the V-MAC support software programs is Two feature location flow charts are located at the
now equipped with an online help function back of this book.
(similar to Windows Help), which provides all of
the information contained in this user’s guide. r SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS features for
Simply press F1 to access online help. Step 4 and above are outlined in 8-341-1.
r CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
Software Distribution features for Step 4 and above are outlined in
8-341-2.
The customer edition of V-MAC support software
contains the Service Support Software
V-MAC II USER INFORMATION
application only, whereas the dealer edition
includes both the Service Support Software and Although the V-MAC support software covers
the Dealer Programming Software applications. both V-MAC II and III systems, this user’s guide is
designed to support V-MAC III. However, user
information for V-MAC II is provided via online
User’s Guide Organization help and through the V-MAC II User’s Guide
The SOFTWARE INSTALLATION section guides (8-302).
the user through installation of both applications
and provides information concerning hardware
requirements, vehicle connections and software
configurations. This section also provides
accessing instructions.

Page 2
8_341.bk Page 3 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

Page 3
8_341.bk Page 4 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION AND
OPERATION
About Installation
Installation of V-MAC support software consists of Installing V-MAC Support Software
installing both Service Support Software and To install the V-MAC support software (CD-ROM)
Dealer Programming Software. Because the on a CD-ROM drive, use the following procedure:
installation procedure is similar for both
applications, only the Service Support Software 1. Insert CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive
installation will be described. (usually drive D:\).
2. Review the “Readme.txt” for further
The installation programs were designed to install installation instructions.
V-MAC support software on a Windows® 95, 98 1
or higher computer.

V-MAC support software cannot run directly from


the program CD-ROM provided by Mack Trucks,
Inc., and therefore, MUST be installed on the
hard drive. The original program CD-ROM should
be saved as a backup copy of the software.

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS, CUSTOMER DATA


PROGRAMMING and DEALER
PROGRAMMING are designed to run individually
and cannot be run at the same time. Figure 1 — Setup Screen

3. At the Setup status screen, click on the


Next button.
Installation Requirements
4. At the License Agreement screen, page
Before installing this software, be sure that the down to read the Service Support Software
minimum hardware requirements are met. (Refer License Agreement. Click on the Yes button
to “Hardware Requirements” on page 8.) to accept the agreement or click on the No
button to reject the agreement and close the
setup.

To install V-MAC III Service Tools, you must


accept this agreement.

Page 4
8_341.bk Page 5 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
2 4

Figure 2 — License Agreement Screen Figure 4 — Copy Files

5. At the Choose Destination Folder screen, The computer will begin copying the files.
click on the Next button to use the MACK
recommended destination folder or click on
the Browse button to select another folder
destination. The system may ask you to view the Service
3
Text. It is recommended that you do because the
Service Text may contain special installation
notes and other important information.

7. When installation is complete, click on the


Finish button.
Repeat the process to install Dealer
Programming.
5

Figure 3 — Choose Destination Folder

Mack Trucks, Inc. does not recommend changing


the destination folder.

6. If all of the settings are correct, click on the


Next button to continue. Figure 5 — Installation Complete

Remember to remove the CD-ROM from the


drive and store properly.

Page 5
8_341.bk Page 6 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
Connecting the Computer to the Accessing V-MAC Support Software
Vehicle Always remember to connect the interface and
To use V-MAC support software, the computer turn the ignition key to the ON position before
must be connected to the vehicle using a accessing V-MAC support software.
communication interface (RP1210A-compliant
serial link adapter). Refer to “Communication This software includes three separate programs:
Interface” on page 9 for communication interface r SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
information.
r CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

USING THE SERIAL LINK ADAPTER r DEALER PROGRAMMING

To connect the serial link adapter: Two methods can be used to access V-MAC
1. Turn the computer on and let it boot (start) support software:
completely. r MACK software folder
2. Connect the serial link adapter end to the r Start Menu
associated communication port on the
computer.
USING THE MACK SOFTWARE FOLDER
Depending on the configuration of the
computer, it may be necessary to use an 1. Double-click on the MACK software folder
adapter or gender changer. Adapters and located on the PC’s desktop.
gender changers are readily available at 2. Double-click on the desired application to
most electronic supply stores. run.
3. Connect the J1708 connector of the
RP1210A-compliant data link adapter to the USING THE START MENU
serial communications port on the vehicle
(located under the dash to the left of the 1. Click on the Start button.
steering column). 2. Select Programs.
4. Turn the ignition key to the ON position. 3. Select Mack Software.
To disconnect the serial link adapter: 4. Select the desired program.
1. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
2. Disconnect the J1708 connector of the
Configuring the Software
RP1210A-compliant data link adapter from Before using V-MAC support software, it must be
the serial communications port on the properly configured.
vehicle.
3. Disconnect the serial link adapter end of the To configure the Service Support Software:
RP1210A-compliant data link adapter from 1. Start either SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS or
the serial port on the computer (remove any CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING. For
adapters or gender changers). Service Diagnostics, click on the Utilities
4. Turn the computer off. button and then the Preferences button. For
Customer Data Programming, click on the
Preferences button.
2. Select Preferences.
3. Choose settings for each of the fields (refer
to the “SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
FIELDS” on page 7).
4. Click on the OK button.

Page 6
8_341.bk Page 7 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
To configure the Dealer Programming Software: Uninstalling V-MAC Software
1. Start DEALER PROGRAMMING and click To access the Uninstall program, use the
on the Utilities tab. following steps:
2. Select Preferences. 1. Click on the Start button.
3. Choose settings for each of the fields (refer 2. Select Settings.
to the “SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
FIELDS” on page 7). 3. Select Control Panel.
4. Click on the OK button. 4. Select Add/Remove Programs.
5. Select the appropriate file.
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION FIELDS 6. Click on the Add/Remove button.
Communications Port — Most systems will use
COM 1 as the communications port. For assistance with installing or uninstalling
V-MAC support software, please contact the
RP1210A Device Name — Most systems will Mack Trucks, Inc. Systems Support Center
use J1708 as the protocol. (800-247-0039). Hours are 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m.
(Eastern time), Monday through Friday.
International Unit Type — Set to either metric or
English display units.

Language — At this time, only English is


available.

Exiting V-MAC Support Software

Always exit V-MAC support software before


turning off the computer.

There are three ways to exit V-MAC support


software:
r Click on the Quit button (from the main
menu).
r Select File and then Exit (for Dealer
Programming).
r Click on the X in the top right corner of the
screen at any time.

Always cycle the key switch after exiting


CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING.

Page 7
8_341.bk Page 8 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Etherlink Card — Required for Dealer Direct
Connect usage and/or if used in Local Area
SPECIAL TOOLS AND Network
EQUIPMENT
PC Cabinet Case — With two more available
Hardware Requirements slots for future expansion

If you are planning to purchase a new desktop Backup Facility — Colorado cartridge, Zip or
PC, this is the current recommended minimum Jazz disk drive (check with PC supplier for
configuration. Although PCs with lesser backup facility suggestions)
configuration may run MACK applications, this is
the minimum configuration recommended for new 101-KEY Keyboard
purchases:
Monitor — 15 inch or larger SVGA Color to
FOR DESKTOP: support 800 x 600 in high color

PC — IBM or compatible computer using FOR NOTEBOOK PC:


Microsoft® Windows® 95/98/ME/NT/2000/XP as
its operating system PC — IBM or compatible computer using
Microsoft® Windows® 95/98/ME/NT/2000/XP as
Processor — Intel Processor with processing its operating system
speed of at least 933 MHz or faster
Processor — Intel Processor with CPU speed of
Memory — 96 to 128 MB RAM at least 850 MHz or faster

Hard Drive — 10 GB Memory — 96 to 128 MB RAM

COM Port — COM 1, COM 2, COM 3 or COM 4 Hard Drive — 10 GB


or parallel port for RP1210A interface adapter;
9-Pin 16550 UART equipped/installed serial port COM Port — COM 1, COM 2, COM 3 or COM 4
(mandatory) or parallel port for RP1210A interface adapter;
9-Pin 16550 UART equipped/installed serial port
Devices — Mouse or other pointing device (mandatory)

Removable Storage Media — CD-ROM drive, Removable (Storage Media) Swappable —


24X or faster CD-ROM, Floppy Disk Drive

3D Graphics Card — At least 8 MB PCMCIA Slots — 2

Modem — 56 Kbps (or faster) V.90 modem if PC Modem — 56 Kbps V.90 modem if used for dial-
is used for dial-up communications. A modem is up communications
not required in Local Area Network with Dealer
Direct Connect Monitor — 14.1" Display — Active color

Xircom Ethernet Adapter

Page 8
8_341.bk Page 9 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
Communication Interface
The V-MAC support software can be used with a
serial link adapter. J 38351, J 38351-A, J 38351-B and J 38351-C
cannot be used as the communication interface
for the V-MAC support software.
SERIAL LINK ADAPTER
The MACK data serial link adapters endorsed as
certified and recommended for use with the
V-MAC support software include the Kent-Moore
J 38351-D and the RP1210A-compliant J 44537 V-MAC support software is not compatible with
PLC adapter model. Personal Digital Assistants (PDAs) such as
6 PalmPilot™* software. Therefore, ensure that
your PDA synchronization software is not running
when using the V-MAC software. To do otherwise
may cause interference in reading the COM port.
Or, you can choose another computer to use
PDAs.
* PalmPilot™ is a trademark of the 3 Com
Corporation.

Figure 6 — Serial Link Adapter


7

Figure 7 — RP1210A-Compliant Adapter, J 44537

Page 9
8_341.bk Page 10 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

NOTES

Page 10
8_341.bk Page 11 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Page 11
8_341.bk Page 12 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
INTRODUCTION VISUAL IDENTIFICATION
Refer to Service Diagnostics for Windows
About Service Diagnostics (Version 2.6) Feature Location Flow Chart for
The V-MAC system offers a variety of diagnostic V-MAC III, Step 4 and higher (8-341-1) for an
tools and modes which can be accessed using overview of Service Diagnostics features and
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS. functions.

Although this version of SERVICE Screen Summaries


DIAGNOSTICS can be used with both V-MAC II
and V-MAC III systems, the instructions SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS MENU
contained in this manual were designed to
The Service Diagnostics Menu presents the
support V-MAC III. For V-MAC II user information,
available Service Diagnostics portion of the
refer to the online help and the V-MAC II User’s
V-MAC Support Software. From this menu, you
Guide (8-302).
can access the following screens: Monitor
Parameters, Fault Codes, Diagnostics, Special
Accessing Service Diagnostics Diagnostic Modes and Utilities.
8

There are two ways to access SERVICE


DIAGNOSTICS:
r If there is a Mack Software folder on the
desktop, double-click on the folder. Then
select the SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS icon.
r If there is no icon on the desktop, access the
start menu, select Programs and select
Mack Programs. Then select Service
Diagnostics.

Online Help Function


This version of V-MAC support software features
an online help function (similar to Windows Help).
The online help includes all of the information
contained in this user’s guide. Simply press F1 to Figure 8 — Service Diagnostics Main Menu
view the help topics.
Click on the Monitor Parameters button to use
the parameter monitoring capabilities (refer to the
Additional Information “SAE PARAMETER MENU SELECTION
The current V-MAC III Service Manual, 8-211, SCREEN” on page 13).
provides a complete description of the operation
of the V-MAC III system, as well as instructions Click on the Fault Codes button to view and clear
for performing diagnostics and repairs of system faults (refer to “FAULT CODES MENU” on page
components. 13).

For additional assistance, please contact the Click on the Diagnostics button to use the
Mack Trucks, Inc. System Support Center at V-MAC system's diagnostic tools (refer to
(800) 247-0039. Hours are 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. “DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MENU” on page 14).
(Eastern time), Monday through Friday.
Click on the Special Diagnostic Modes button to
use the special diagnostic modes (refer to
“SPECIAL DIAGNOSTIC MODES MENU” on
page 14).

Page 12
8_341.bk Page 13 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Utilities button to customize the Click on the Next button to begin parameter
Service Diagnostics configuration (refer to monitoring with the current selections (refer to
“UTILITIES MENU” on page 16). “PARAMETER MONITORING DISPLAY
SCREENS” on page 16).
Click on the Quit button to exit the program.
Click on the Main Menu button to return to the
Service Diagnostics menu.
SAE PARAMETER MENU SELECTION
SCREEN
FAULT CODES MENU
The SAE Parameter Menu Selection Screen
allows you to choose which of the parameters The Fault Codes Menu allows you to view and
you want displayed during a monitoring session. clear faults. From this submenu, you can enter
Up to 30 items may be selected for Standard the All Active Faults screen, Controller Fault
Display and an additional 7 items may be Table and choose the controller type.
selected for Advanced Display. You can also 10

change the default list of parameters from this


submenu.
9

Figure 10 — Fault Codes Menu

Click on the All Active Faults button to view the


Figure 9 — SAE Parameter Menu Selection Screen Active Faults display screen (refer to “ALL
ACTIVE FAULTS DISPLAY SCREEN” on page
Click on the Default Selections button to select 17).
the default parameters.
Select a desired controller — click on the
Click on the Save as Default button to save the appropriate radio button — to view under the
current selections as the default. Note that there Choose Controller area of the screen.
can only be one set of default parameters.
Then, click on the Controller Fault Table button
Click on the Standard Display radio button to to view the specified controller of the Fault Table
view the Standard Display. display screen (refer to “CONTROLLER FAULT
TABLE DISPLAY SCREEN” on page 17).
Click on the Advanced Display radio button to
view the Advanced Display (available only on Click on the Back button to return to the Service
vehicles with an ASET™ AC engine). Diagnostics menu.

Click on the Clear Selections button to clear the


current parameter selections.

Page 13
8_341.bk Page 14 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MENU Click on the Switch Status Display button to
view the current status of a variety of switches
The Diagnostic Tools Menu contains the following
(refer to “SWITCH STATUS DISPLAY SCREEN”
seven screens: Vehicle Information,
on page 21).
Programming History, Switch Status Display,
Vehicle Data Log Display, Maintenance Data Log
Click on the Vehicle Data Log Display button to
Display, Adaptive Cruise Control Status, and
view the Vehicle Data Log (refer to “VEHICLE
Fault Reporter Configuration. Each screen
DATA LOG DISPLAY SCREEN” on page 21).
contains functions to aid in diagnosing vehicle
problems and acquiring vehicle information.
11 Click on the Maintenance Data Log Display
button to view the Maintenance Data Log (refer to
“MAINTENANCE DATA LOG DISPLAY
SCREEN” on page 21).

Click on the Adaptive Cruise Control Status


button to view the current status of faults in
SmartCruise (refer to “ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL SCREEN” on page 23).

Click on the Configure Fault Reporter button to


set the Fault Reporter to run under Occurrence
Mode or History Mode and to select what type of
faults should be captured (refer to “FAULT
REPORTER CONFIGURATION SCREEN” on
page 23).

Click on the Back button to return to the Service


Figure 11 — Diagnostic Tools Menu Diagnostics menu.

Click on the Vehicle Information button to view


the Vehicle Information display screen (refer to SPECIAL DIAGNOSTIC MODES MENU
“VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY SCREEN” The Special Diagnostic Modes Menu contains the
on page 20). following eight screens: Chassis Dyno Mode,
Cylinder Cut-Out Test, Engine Run-Up Test,
Click on the Programming History button to Engine Compression, Engine Brake Test, Wiggle
view the programming history for each ECU (refer Wire Test, Cylinder Balance Test, and VGT Test.
to “PROGRAMMING HISTORY DISPLAY Each screen contains functions to aid in testing
SCREEN” on page 20). vehicle performance and diagnosing vehicle
problems.

Page 14
8_341.bk Page 15 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
12

Figure 12 — Special Diagnostic Modes Menu

Click on the Chassis Dyno Mode button to Click on the Engine Compression button to
initiate Chassis DYNO Mode (refer to “CHASSIS initiate a specialized cylinder compression test
DYNO MODE DISPLAY SCREEN” on page 24). (refer to “ENGINE COMPRESSION TEST
Cycle power with key switch before continuing SCREEN” on page 26). Cycle power with key
with other tests. switch before continuing with other tests.

Click on the Cylinder Cut-Out Test button to Click on the Engine Brake Test button to run
initiate specialized cylinder tests (refer to engine brake solenoid test (refer to “ENGINE
“CYLINDER CUT-OUT TEST DISPLAY BRAKE TEST SCREEN” on page 26). Cycle
SCREEN” on page 25). Cycle power with key power with key switch before continuing with
switch before continuing with other tests. other tests.

Click on the Engine Run-Up Test button to Click on the Wiggle Wire Test button to initiate
initiate testing on the unit pumps (refer to the wiggle wire test (refer to “WIGGLE WIRE
“ENGINE RUN-UP TEST SCREEN” on page 25). TEST SCREEN” on page 27). Cycle power with
Cycle power with key switch before continuing key switch before continuing with other tests.
with other tests.

Page 15
8_341.bk Page 16 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Cylinder Balance Test button to PARAMETER MONITORING DISPLAY
initiate the cylinder balance test (refer to SCREENS
“CYLINDER BALANCE TEST” on page 28).
The Parameter Monitoring screen, accessed from
Cycle power with key switch before continuing
the Monitor Parameters button, allows you to
with other tests.
monitor the parameters selected, view faults,
change the idle speed and take a picture of the
Click on the VGT Test button to initiate the VGT
current displayed screen.
test (refer to “VGT VANE POSITION 14
CALIBRATION TEST” on page 28). Cycle power
with key switch before continuing with other tests.

Click on the Back button to return to the Service


Diagnostics menu.

UTILITIES MENU
The Utilities Menu allows you to modify several
functions which affect the way the program
operates when performing operations from other
parts of the program.
13

Figure 14 — Parameters Monitoring Standard Display


Screen
15

Figure 13 — Utilities Menu

Click on the Display Parameter Snapshot(s)


button to select a snapshot to be displayed.

Click on the Print Parameter Snapshot(s)


button to select a snapshot to be printed.
Figure 15 — Parameters Monitoring Advanced Display
Screen (for ASET™ AC Engines Only)
Click on the Preferences button to access the
current configuration settings.
Click on the Pause button to pause live
monitoring.
Click on the Back button to return to the Service
Diagnostic menu.
Click on the View Faults button to view the fault
table.

Click on the Change Idle Speed button to


change the low-idle speed.

Page 16
8_341.bk Page 17 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Print button to print the Fault Table
display screen.
Engine must be running with park brake set and Click on the Clear Fault Codes button to clear
accelerator not depressed. the Fault Table.

Click on the Fault Reporter button to view, print,


Click on the Snapshot button to take a picture of
save and/or clear faults from the fault record
the current display screen.
(refer to “FAULT REPORTER SCREEN” on page
18).
Click on the Back button to return to the SAE
Parameter menu.
Click on the Back button to return to the Fault
menu.
Click on the Main Menu button to return to the
Service Diagnostics menu.
CONTROLLER FAULT TABLE DISPLAY
SCREEN
The Controller Fault Table screen displays the
The Parameters Monitoring Advanced Display current faults and allows you to print and clear the
screen is for ASET™ AC engines (1MS368 fault codes.
EECU) only. 17

The parameter values are continuously updated


as the data is received on the serial data line. If
active faults are detected during a monitoring
session, the Fault Status item on the screen will
change from “No Faults Noted” to “Faults
Occurred.” To find out what the fault is, click on
the View Faults button.

ALL ACTIVE FAULTS DISPLAY SCREEN


The Active Faults screen allows you to view faults
that are presently occurring. A description of the
fault is displayed in a scrollable window.
16

Figure 17 — Controller Fault Table Display Screen

Click on the Print button to print the Fault Table


display screen.

Click on the Clear Fault Codes button to clear


the Fault Table.

Click on the Fault Reporter button to view, print,


save and/or clear faults from the fault record
(refer to “FAULT REPORTER SCREEN” on page
18).

Click on the Back button to return to the Fault


menu.
Figure 16 — All Active Faults Display

Page 17
8_341.bk Page 18 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
FAULT REPORTER SCREEN One bucket is reserved for Engine ECU faults
and another for Vehicle ECU faults. The fourth
The Fault Reporter screen displays detailed
bucket is reserved for either an Engine or Vehicle
information during and around the time when a
ECU fault.
fault occurs. The Fault Reporter logs any fault
found on a vehicle. This information can be
Each bucket can look for a specific fault. Each
viewed, printed, saved and erased. The Fault
bucket has a MID filter, a PID or SID filter and a
Reporter can contain up to four faults and has
FMI filter. Any of these filters can be set to log
two operating modes: Occurrence (default) and
“ALL.” Consequently, you can set up a log to
History.
record all PID 100 faults from any MID.
Occurrence Mode records operating conditions
that exist when a fault is detected via the J1587
line. When a fault becomes active, the data is
written to the Fault Reporter and saved. Although The tool requires that the user have some
information will not be lost to an intermittent knowledge of the J1587 protocol because there is
power failure, it can be overwritten if a new fault no help by design.
becomes active. Therefore, it is recommended
that the fault be viewed and printed if a record is
Each bucket also has a time limit for which it will
needed.
be active (60 seconds by default) and can log the
fault for a total of 10 times. Once a bucket’s time
History Mode checks the operating data every
limit has expired, it becomes available to log
few seconds until a fault is detected that matches
another fault. Fault Reporter will enter faults into
a specified trigger fault. When detected, the fault
the oldest available bucket that allows the fault to
and its operating condition are written and saved
pass in that bucket’s filters. Data in Fault
to the Fault Reporter. The data will not be
Reporter moves out and into the fault log table to
overwritten because Fault Reporter becomes
be replaced with new data.
“frozen” to provide a history of what was
happening on the chassis just before the fault
occurred. To overwrite the data, a technician
must reset the history mode or change the Fault
Reporter to occurrence mode. Some history History Mode writes operation data to all four
information may be lost if an intermittent power buckets every two seconds (programmable) in a
failure occurs before the trigger fault is detected. circular loop.
18
The Fault Reporter can log faults from the
transmission controller, ABS, Vorad, Qualcomm
and the Engine and Vehicle ECUs. Four
registers, or “buckets,” of memory, are available
to log faults. The first bucket holds the most
recent fault.

Fault Reporter will not always log the most recent


fault because of active time limits and the fact
that times can vary between buckets. For
example, if a fault comes in and all the buckets
are in use, the fault will be dropped. The active
faults must become inactive by clearing the Fault
Reporter (refer to “CLEARING FAULT
REPORTER” on page 19).
Figure 18 — Fault Reporter Screen

Page 18
8_341.bk Page 19 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Print button to print the Fault CLEARING FAULT REPORTER
Reporter Table display screen.
There are four ways to clear data from the Fault
Reporter:
Click on the Save button to save data to the
appropriate directory. r Clear Fault Reporter directly.
r Clear either fault table (VECU or EECU).
Click on the Clear Fault Reporter button to
remove faults from the Fault Reporter table. r Switch between History and Occurrence
modes.
r Allow Fault Reporter to automatically clear
data if a fault does not become active after
It is recommended that if you clear faults from the 50 engine starts.
Fault Reporter, clear the ECU fault tables also so
that they and Fault Reporter stay synchronized.
FAULT REPORTER LOG ITEMS
Fault Reporter will log the following when a fault
Click on the Back button to return to the Active
is discovered:
Faults Table display.

Item Description
Time & Date Stamp Time & Date Stamp when fault first occurred
Vehicle Distance Odometer reading when fault first occurred
MID MID of the module reporting the fault
PID or SID PID or SID of fault
FMI Fault FMI
Duration Amount of time the fault was active
Vehicle Speed Vehicle speed when fault became active
Engine Speed Engine speed when fault became active
Accelerator Pedal Pedal position when fault became active
Switches All switch positions
Intake Temperature Intake Manifold Temp. when fault active
Coolant Temperature Engine Coolant Temp. when fault active
Ambient Air Temperature Ambient temperature when fault active
Voltage System voltage
Percent Engine Load Percent engine load when fault became active
Speed Control Status Cruise/brake/set/decel/resume/clutch modes
Inputs Faulted Fault Reporter will tag critical items in this list that were faulted when a fault
occurred: engine speed, vehicle speed, intake, coolant and ambient
temperature
Time of up to 8 secondary occurrences

NOTE: If the service tool finds a fault in the fault log that is also in the Fault Reporter, it will tag (***) to that fault, indicating that
more information is available.

Page 19
8_341.bk Page 20 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY SCREEN PROGRAMMING HISTORY DISPLAY SCREEN
The Vehicle Information screen displays vehicle The Programming History screen shows the
information and allows you to change the programming history of the Vehicle and Engine
governor type. Changing the governor type ECU OEM, vehicle and engine data, customer
affects the way the accelerator position is used to data and fleet data.
determine the driver’s desired power or speed but 20

doesn’t affect the engine power or torque rise.


You may choose the All Speed governor or an
“automotive” type Mini-Max governor.
19

Figure 20 — Programming History Display Screen

Click on the Back button to return to the


Diagnostic Tools menu.
Figure 19 — Vehicle Information Display Screen

Click on the Governor Type button to change the


governor type. Cycle power with the key switch
for the governor change to take effect.

When changing the governor type, make sure the


engine is not running.

Click on the Back button to return to the


Diagnostic Tools menu.

Page 20
8_341.bk Page 21 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
SWITCH STATUS DISPLAY SCREEN Click on the Reset button to reset the trip values
of the Vehicle Data Log to zero.
The Switch Status screen monitors and displays
the current status of the cab-mounted switches. It
Click on the Save button to save the Vehicle Data
is especially useful for diagnosing wiring
Log. A pop-up window will appear and ask for a
problems associated with these switches.
21 location to save the text file information.

Click on the Print button to print the Vehicle Data


Log.

Click on the Back button to return to the


Diagnostic Tools menu.

MAINTENANCE DATA LOG DISPLAY SCREEN


The Maintenance Data Log screen displays
maintenance items such as oil change and allows
you to reset an item.
23

Figure 21 — Switch Status Display Screen

Click on the Back button to return to the


Diagnostic Tools menu.

VEHICLE DATA LOG DISPLAY SCREEN


The Vehicle Data Log screen displays the life and
trip information of the vehicle. The items shown
under “Life” are the totals for each item. The
totals accumulate from the date the vehicle was
built or from the date the V-MAC module was
changed or reprogrammed.
22 Figure 23 — Maintenance Data Log Display Screen

Figure 22 — Vehicle Data Log Display Screen

Page 21
8_341.bk Page 22 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Reset button to call up the ENABLE PREDICTIVE OIL CHANGE POP-UP
Maintenance Reset screen. Select the SCREEN
maintenance item you want to reset by clicking on
The Enable Predictive Oil Change pop-up screen
the appropriate button.
24 permits you to enable this feature after an oil
change reset. This feature must first be enabled
in OEM Data (on the MACK database) via the F3
Update Option screen of V-MAC.
25

Figure 25 — Enable Predictive Oil Change Pop-Up


Screen

Click on the Yes button to enable Predictive Oil


Change. A Caution message box will appear with
a list of qualifications. If the vehicle meets the
requirement’s list, click on the Yes button. The
Figure 24 — Maintenance Reset Screen Predictive Oil Change feature will now be
enabled.
When a maintenance item is selected, the 26

Maintenance Reset Confirmation pop-up box will


appear, asking if you are sure you want to reset
the item. Click on theYes button to reset the
maintenance item.

Click on the Save button to save the Maintenance


Data Log. A pop-up window will appear and ask
for a location to save the text file information.

Click on the Back button to return to the Figure 26 — Caution Message Box
Diagnostic Tools menu.

To see changes made to maintenance items, you Predictive Oil Change can only be enabled/
must back out and re-enter the Maintenance Data disabled when resetting the oil change or oil &
Log Display screen. filter change.

As a standalone feature, Predictive Oil Change is


available with VECU software 1MS336 or higher.
As part of the GuardDog™ monitoring system,
Predictive Oil Change is available with 1MS349
VECU s/w and for ASET™ AI engines with
1MS364 VECU s/w and 1MS371 data file.

Page 22
8_341.bk Page 23 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
FAULT REPORTER CONFIGURATION
SCREEN
Predictive Oil Change is not available on MR and The Fault Reporter Configuration screen allows
LE models or chassis with an ASET™ AC engine. you to set the Fault Reporter to run under
Occurrence Mode or History Mode. For more
information refer to the “SERVICE
For more information on Predictive Oil Change, DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS” table on page 33.
refer to the “SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS 28

FUNCTIONS” table on page 33.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SCREEN


The Adaptive Cruise Control screen allows you to
view a detected fault in active cruise control. For
more information about Adaptive Cruise Control,
refer to the “SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
FUNCTIONS” table on page 33.
27

Figure 27 — Adaptive Cruise Control Screen

Click on the Adaptive Cruise Control button to


view a detected fault.
Figure 28 — Fault Reporter Configuration Screen
Click on the Yes button to disable Adaptive
Cruise Control and re-enable standard cruise Click on the Clear button to clear data in the Fault
control. Reporter.

Notify the driver that Adaptive Cruise Control is Data will be erased if you clear it; therefore, print
disabled. a copy of the data before clearing the Fault
Reporter if a record of the fault is desired.
Click on the Back button to return to the
Diagnostic Tools menu. Click on the Set Defaults button to select Fault
Reporter default settings.

Page 23
8_341.bk Page 24 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Advanced Setup button to select
Occurrence Mode or History Mode, choose what
type of faults to capture, decide the snapshot
time between logged records, and define how Expertise in J1587 protocol is required to
long a record should be “saved” before being program filters. Do not attempt to program filters if
overwritten (refer to “FAULT REPORTER you have no such expertise. Improper
ADVANCED SETUP SCREEN” on page 24). configuration of the Fault Reporter Advanced
Setup may lead to the omission of pertinent
Click on the Back button to return to the diagnostic information from the Fault Reporter
Diagnostic Tools menu. table. Please refer to the Troubleshooting/SAE
Message Descriptions section found in the
V-MAC® III Service Manual, Mack Trucks, Inc.
FAULT REPORTER ADVANCED SETUP publication number 8-211, for additional
SCREEN information.
The Fault Reporter Advanced Setup screen,
accessed from the Fault Reporter Configuration
The Fault Reporter Advanced Setup screen also
screen, allows you to select the type of operating
contains the Retrigger Hold-Off function, which
mode (History or Occurrence) to record a fault
decides how long the Fault Reporter will delay
and four filters to record specific faults of interest.
29 writing another incident of a previously recorded
fault. For information on Fault Reporter Advanced
Setup, refer to the “SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
FUNCTIONS” table on page 33.

CHASSIS DYNO MODE DISPLAY SCREEN


The Chassis Dyno Mode screen allows the
vehicle to be operated on a dynamometer without
creating a service brake fault code. During
normal operation, V-MAC will drop the vehicle out
of cruise control mode if a rapid deceleration
without a service brake application is detected.
During the chassis dyno mode, V-MAC ignores
deceleration without a service brake application,
allowing the vehicle to be operated on a
dynamometer with cruise control turned in the ON
position.
30

Figure 29 — Fault Reporter Advanced Setup Screen

Figure 30 — Chassis Dyno Mode Screen

Page 24
8_341.bk Page 25 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Click on the Start Dyno Mode button to begin. Click on the Back button to return to the Service
Diagnostics menu.
Click on the Exit button to enter another test
mode.
ENGINE RUN-UP TEST SCREEN
Click on the Back button to return to the The Engine Run-Up Test screen allows you to
Diagnostic Tools menu. check the fuel delivery of each individual unit
pump/injector pair to diagnose low power
complaints and problems with rough running.
This test will run up each pump three times. For
Be sure to cycle the key switch OFF, and wait at more information on this test, please refer to the
least 7 seconds. Then cycle the key switch back “SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS” table
ON after the dynamometer tests are completed. on page 33.
32
Do NOT put the chassis back into operation with
the Chassis DYNO Mode enabled.

CYLINDER CUT-OUT TEST DISPLAY SCREEN


The Cylinder Cut-Out Test screen allows you to
individually test each cylinder at low idle to help
identify the source of rough running or engine
miss. For more information on this test, please
refer to the “SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
FUNCTIONS” table on page 33.
31

Figure 32 — Engine Run-Up Test Screen

Click on the Start Engine Run-Up button to test


each individual unit pump/injector pair. Click the
Stop Engine Run-Up button to end test. Cycle
power with key switch before continuing with
other tests.

To cancel a test, click on the Cancel Test button


in the Test Control Panel area of the screen.

Figure 31 — Cylinder Cut-Out Test Screen


To generate a report and save results, select
Select the appropriate test cylinder in the “Select “Save Test Results to File” — located at the
Test Cylinder” area of the screen. bottom of the screen — and run test. At the finish
of the test, a pop-up window will appear and ask
Then, click on the Start Cut-Out Test + button to for a location to save the text file.
test cylinders 1 through 6.

Click on the Stop Cut-Out Test or Cancel Test Click on the Back button to return to the Service
button to end the test. Cycle power with key Diagnostics menu.
switch before continuing with other tests.

Page 25
8_341.bk Page 26 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
ENGINE COMPRESSION TEST SCREEN ENGINE BRAKE TEST SCREEN
The Engine Compression Test screen allows you The Engine Brake Test screen lets you verify that
to isolate and test the compression of each the engine brake solenoids are electrically
cylinder to help diagnose low power complaints operational. For more information on this test,
and problems with rough running. For more please refer to the “SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
information on this test, please refer to the FUNCTIONS” table on page 33.
“SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS” table 34

on page 33.
33

Figure 34 — Engine Brake Test Screen

Figure 33 — Engine Compression Test Screen Choose the engine brake to be tested under the
Engine Brake Test area of the screen.
Click on the Start Compression button to initiate
the engine compression test. Then, click on the Start Test button to initiate the
engine brake solenoid test.

To generate a report and save results, select


“Save Test Results to File” — located at the Parking brake must be set to perform the current
bottom of the screen — and run test. At the finish test.
of the test, a pop-up window will appear and ask
for a location to save the text file.

The Starter must be engaged when prompted to


run this test.

Click on the Cancel Test button to end the test or


allow the test to end itself. Cycle power with key
switch before continuing with other tests.

Click on the Back button to return to Service


Diagnostics menu.

Page 26
8_341.bk Page 27 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

While test is being performed, listen for “clicking” For Step 5 systems (VECU s/w 1MS316A), this
sounds under the valve covers. test is supported in the VECU only. For Step 8
and above systems (VECU s/w 1MS336,
1MS336A, 1MS349, and 1MS364 and EECU s/w
1MS327, 1MS363, 1MS334A and 1MS368), this
test is supported in both the VECU and EECU.
To generate a report and save results, select
35
“Save Test Results to File” — located at the
bottom of the screen — and run test. At the finish
of the test, a pop-up window will appear and ask
for a location to save the text file.

Click on the Stop Test or Cancel Test button to


end the test. Cycle power with key switch before
continuing with other tests.

Click on the Back button to return to the Service


Diagnostics menu.

WIGGLE WIRE TEST SCREEN


The Wiggle Wire Test screen helps to detect open
or short conditions in the vehicle wiring harness
or connectors. The test can be invoked at any Figure 35 — Wiggle Wire Test Screen
time.
Click on the Start Wire Test button to enable
wiggle wire mode.

It is assumed that a technician will supervise Click on the Cancel Test button to cancel the
while the Wiggle Wire Test is running. test.

Click on the Exit button to end the test. Cycle


When the Start button is clicked, the test will run power with key switch before continuing with
automatically and continuously. When the Exit other tests.
button is clicked, the technician can go to any
other screen in Service Diagnostics and monitor Click on the Back button to return to the Service
parameters or faults as appropriate. For more Diagnostics menu.
information on this test, please refer to the
“SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS” table
on page 33.

Page 27
8_341.bk Page 28 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
CYLINDER BALANCE TEST VGT VANE POSITION CALIBRATION TEST
The Cylinder Balance Test screen shows you The VGT Vane Position Calibration Test screen
how the Engine ECU is balancing the cylinders by helps to aid in determining whether boost
measuring how much fuel is being displaced. The pressure or power complaints are due to incorrect
screen will display a graphical representation of a calibration. The test will automatically program
deviation from the average fuel usage. the Engine ECU with the vane position’s
36
calibration data. Or, the tool will indicate that the
sensor is out of range and should be replaced.
37

Figure 36 — Cylinder Balance Test Screen

Click on the Start Balance Test button to begin Figure 37 — VGT Vane Position Calibration Test Screen
the test.
Typically, this test is run when a new VGT Vane
Click on the Stop button to stop the test. unit is installed.
Click on the Cancel Test button to cancel the
test.

Click on the Back button to return to the Service It is recommended that the technician performing
Diagnostics menu. this test have an assistant confirm that the
actuator reaches its 0% and 100% stopped
positions.

The Cylinder Balance Test is supported for Step 4


(EECU s/w 1MS38P2) ONLY.

Page 28
8_341.bk Page 29 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
Cummins Screen Summaries
The following screens will appear if the vehicle is
To perform this test, the engine must be off, the equipped with a Cummins engine (to identify that
ignition key turned to the ON position, the coolant you are connected to a Cummins ECU, launch
temperature above 140°F and the turbocharger Service Diagnostics and go to Vehicle Information
relatively cool (not to operating temperature). screen located in the Diagnostics portion of the
Also, ensure that primary and secondary air software).
pressure is at least 110 psi.
CUMMINS SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS MAIN
MENU
38

To generate a report and save results, select


“Save Test Results to File” — located at the
bottom of the screen — and run test. At the finish
of the test, a pop-up window will appear and ask
for a location to sae the text file.

Click on the Start Test button to begin the VGT


Vane Position Calibration test. Ensure that an
assistant monitors the movement of the actuator.

Click on the Stop button to stop the test if


needed.

Click on the Cancel Test button to cancel the test


if needed.

Click on the Back button to return to the Service Figure 38 — Cummins Service Diagnostics Main Menu
Diagnostics menu.
This menu lists the available options for a vehicle
equipped with a Cummins engine.

Click on the Monitor Parameters button to use


The VGT Vane Position Calibration Test is the parameter monitoring capabilities (refer to the
supported for Step 2 and higher ASET™ AC “CUMMINS SAE PARAMETER MENU
engines (with EECU s/w 1MS334A and 1MS368) SELECTION SCREEN” on page 30).
only.
Click on the Fault Codes button to view and clear
faults (refer to “FAULT CODES MENU” on page
13).
If the actuator does not visibly reach its 100% Click on the Diagnostics button to use the
stopped position, the test results have failed, V-MAC system’s diagnostic tools (refer to
even if the diagnostic tool reports a successful “CUMMINS DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MENU” on
test. Either the air pressure is too low or the page 30).
mechanism is binding and must be replaced.
Click on the Utilities button to customize the
Service Diagnostics configuration (refer to
“UTILITIES MENU” on page 16).

Click on the Quit button to exit the program.

Page 29
8_341.bk Page 30 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
CUMMINS SAE PARAMETER MENU CUMMINS DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS MENU
SELECTION SCREEN
The Cummins Diagnostic Tools Menu contains
The Cummins SAE Parameter Menu Selection three screens: Vehicle Information, Programming
Screen allows you to chose which parameters History and Calibrate Throttle Pedal. Each screen
you want to display during a monitoring session. contains functions to aid in diagnosing vehicle
39
problems and acquiring vehicle information.
40

Figure 39 — Cummins SAE Parameter Menu Selection


Screen Figure 40 — Cummins Diagnostic Tools Menu

Click on the Default Selections button to select Click on the Vehicle Information button to view
the default parameters. the Vehicle Information display screen (refer to
“VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY SCREEN”
Click on the Save As Default button to save the on page 20).
current selections as the default. Note that there
can only be one set of default parameters. Click on the Programming History button to
view the programming history for each ECU (refer
Click on the Clear Selections button to clear the to “PROGRAMMING HISTORY DISPLAY
current parameter selections. SCREEN” on page 20).
Click on the Next button to begin parameter Click on the Calibrate Throttle Pedal button to
monitoring with the current selections. access the Calibrate Throttle Pedal Screen (refer
to “CUMMINS CALIBRATE THROTTLE PEDAL
Click on the Main Menu button to return to the SCREEN” on page 31).
Cummins Service Diagnostics Menu.
Click on the Back button to return to the
Cummins Service Diagnostics Main Menu.

Page 30
8_341.bk Page 31 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
CUMMINS CALIBRATE THROTTLE PEDAL CUMMINS CALIBRATE THROTTLE PEDAL
SCREEN PROCEDURE SCREEN
41 42

Figure 41 — Cummins Calibrate Throttle Pedal Screen Figure 42 — Cummins Calibrate Throttle Pedal
Procedure Screen
Click on the Calibrate Throttle Pedal button. The
Calibrate Throttle Pedal pop-up window will A pop-up window will appear with instructions.
appear. The instructions are as follows:
1. Click on the OK button.
Click on the Yes button to calibrate the throttle
pedal (or click on the No button to cancel the 2. Press the accelerator pedal down and
procedure). The Calibrate Throttle Pedal release (for a total of about 2 seconds from
Procedure screen will appear. the down and up position of the accelerator
pedal). Repeat two more times.
3. If the procedure is successful, you will
receive a pop-up message indicating a
successful calibration.
4. If the procedure fails, repeat the procedure.

Page 31
8_341.bk Page 32 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III
Step Level System VECU Software P/N EECU Software P/N
2† 1MS334A
3† 1MS368
4 1MS312A 1MS38P2
5 1MS316A 1MS317
6 1MS320
7 1MS328 1MS326
7A 1MS326A
8 1MS336 1MS327
1MS327 Ω (12MS413AM)
8A 1MS336A
9 1MS349 1MS363
9B* 1MS364

† — For ASET™ AC engines


* — For ASET™ AI engines
Ω — For integral barometric sensor

Page 32
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS


Function Description Location Instructions
Active Faults Presents a list of all controllers →Monitor Parameters If any faults occurred during the current monitoring session, this screen will
While that transmitted active faults →Next (Parameter Monitoring) automatically appear upon exiting the Parameter Monitoring display screen. To
Monitoring during the current monitoring exit the screen, click on the OK button.
List session.
8_341.bk Page 33 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Calibrate Allows the user to calibrate the →Cummins Service Diagnostic 1. Click on theYes button to begin the procedure.
Throttle Pedal throttle pedal. →Diagnostics (Calibrate Throttle
2. Press the throttle pedal down and release (for about a total of 2 seconds).
Pedal)
3. Press the throttle pedal down and release (for about a total of 2 seconds).
4. Press the throttle pedal down and release (for about a total of 2 seconds).
5. A “procedure successful” or “procedure failed” message will appear after
the procedure is complete. Repeat the process if unsuccessful.
NOTE: This feature is available only if equipped with a Cummins engine.
Capturing Allows the user to take a →Monitor Parameters Click on the Snapshot button to create a display screen snapshot.
Display picture or “snapshot” of the →Next (Parameter Monitoring)
Screen current Parameter Monitoring NOTE: Each snapshot will be saved in the V-MACa file named vmxxxxxx.prn
Snapshots display screen. (where “xxxxxx” stands for the serial number of the vehicle). If no file exists, a
new file will be created in the vmacss directory.
Each snapshot can be viewed and/or printed at a later time.
Changing Allows the user to change the →Monitor Parameters 1. Click on the Change Idle Speed button to bring up the Engine Idle Speed
Engine Idle idle speed during live or →Next (Parameter Monitoring) entry form.
Speed paused parameter monitoring. NOTE: The current speed will be displayed if it is within the allowable range
(500 to 750 rpm). Otherwise, the initial engine speed will be set at 650 rpm.

2. Type in the desired engine idle speed and click on the OK button.
NOTE: The new engine idle speed must be between 500 and 750 rpm. If it is
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

not within this range, a message will appear instructing the user to enter a
speed between 500 and 750 rpm.

Page 33
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions

Page 34
Changing the Allows the user to change the →Diagnostics Click on the Governor Type button to toggle between All Speed and Min-Max.
Governor governor type between All →Vehicle Information
Type Speed and Min-Max. The main advantage of the All Speed governor is its load-sensing ability, which
enables the engine to maintain a preselected engine speed for PTO
NOTE: Changing the governor applications. This governor uses the throttle pedal position to control engine
selection will not affect the speed. If an increase in engine load requires more horsepower to maintain the
engine power rating or torque engine speed, the All Speed governor increases the horsepower automatically
rise. It will only affect how the (within limits). All engine speeds are controlled in this way, from low idle with no
accelerator position is used to load to high idle with full load.
determine the driver’s desired
power or speed. The Min-Max governor may be regarded as faster and more responsive but
may be too sensitive for some drivers or applications. This governor has a more
8_341.bk Page 34 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

direct or proportional response to the throttle pedal; it uses the throttle pedal
position to control engine power. If the pedal is depressed halfway, the engine
will deliver 50% of the power. If the pedal is depressed another 10%, it will
deliver 60% of the available power. The Min-Max governor regulates engine
speed only at the minimum (0%) or maximum (100%) throttle position. In the
range between the minimum and maximum positions, the driver controls the
speed by adjusting the throttle pedal position.
NOTE: Once the governor type is changed, a message will appear instructing
the user to cycle the ignition.
Chassis Programs V-MAC to ignore →Special Diagnostic Modes During normal operation, V-MAC will drop a vehicle out of cruise control if a
DYNO Mode deceleration without service →Chassis DYNO Mode rapid deceleration occurs without service brake application. With this mode
brake application. enabled, the vehicle can be operated on a dynamometer with cruise control
enabled.
NOTE: Be sure to cycle the ignition (turn the key OFF, wait 7 seconds, then turn
the key ON again) after the dynamometer tests are completed. Do NOT put the
chassis back into operation with Chassis DYNO Mode enabled.
Clearing Allows the user to clear the →Monitor Parameters At any time, press the Clear Selections button to erase the current selections.
Current current selections.
Selections
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Clearing Fault Allows the user to clear the →Fault Codes Click on the Clear Fault Codes button for confirmation.
Tables fault table for any given →Fault Table
controller that is displayed. NOTE: If a fault occurs after the fault table is cleared and before the power to
the controller is cycled (turned OFF and then ON again), the fault may not be
entered into the controller’s fault table. Therefore, a request to view the fault
table immediately after it has been cleared may not accurately display faults
that occurred after the table was cleared. To view faults that occurred after
clearing the table, use the Active Faults selection from the Fault menu.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions
Cylinder Allows the technician to see →Special Diagnostic Modes This test is available for Step 4 systems (EECU 1MS38P2) only.
Balance Test how the EECU is balancing the →Cylinder Test
cylinders by measuring how The upper portion of the Cylinder Balance Test display screen shows the results
much fuel is being displaced. of the cylinder balance test.
NOTE: The numbers displayed represent the correction needed to match the
desired mg/stroke (as determined by the calibration code).
NOTE: Test results must be interpreted according to firing order (1-5-3-6-2-4). It
isn’t unusual for a cylinder before or after a “bad” cylinder in the firing order to
8_341.bk Page 35 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

also be high or low in fuel, as compared to the mean. This can also be true with
cylinders 360 degrees out of phase with the problem cylinder. However, the flow
of these sister cylinders is usually in the opposite direction.
Cylinder Individually tests each of the →Special Diagnostic Modes To use the cylinder cut-out test, the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph and the
Cut-Out Test cylinders at low idle to help →Cylinder Test parking brake must be set. For Step 4 systems (EECU software 1MS38P2), the
identify the source of rough throttle position must be at 0%.
running or an engine miss.
To initiate a test, select the cylinder to be cut out and click on the Start Cut-Out
button.
Default Allows the user to change the →Utilities 1. Select the desired unit for each item:
Display communications port, display Communications Port — Most systems will use COM 1 as the
Settings units (i.e., metric vs. English) communications port.
and language used in the International Unit Type — Set to either metric or English display units.
V-MAC programs.
Language — At this time, the only language available is English.
2. Click on the Save Default Settings button.
Engine Brake Verifies that the engine brake →Special Diagnostic Modes This test is available for Step 7 and higher EECU software (s/w) and Step 2 and
Test solenoids are electrically →Engine Brake Test higher EECU s/w (for ASET™ AC engines) only. Please see the “STEP/
operational. SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32.
To use the engine brake test, the key switch must be on while the engine is not
running (engine rpm = 0). Once the test is active, the solenoid(s) will turn on
and off about once per second and produce a faint clicking sound. Absence of
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

the clicking sound may indicate a wiring problem.


The software will automatically cycle the key switch.
NOTE: Engine brake should be off during the test.

Page 35
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions

Page 36
Engine Isolates and tests the →Special Diagnostic Modes This test is available for Step 7 and higher EECU s/w and Step 2 and higher
Compression compression of each individual →Engine Compression Test EECU s/w (for ASET™ AC engines) only. Please see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Test cylinder to diagnose low power IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32.
complaints and problems with
rough running. Engine should Characterizes each cylinder’s compression stroke via a ratio (compression
be at operating temperature to time/expansion time). An engine with good compression has a ratio between
perform this test to rule out a 1.85 to 1.95.
cold engine start. Each cylinder should be compared with other cylinders in the engine, but not
with those from other engines.
When the start button is clicked, the technician will be instructed to engage the
8_341.bk Page 36 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

starter. The test mode will prevent engine fueling.


NOTE: To run this test, the engine must be off, the transmission in neutral with
the clutch pedal released and the parking brake set.
Engine Checks the fuel delivery of →Special Diagnostic Modes This test is available for Step 7 and higher EECU s/w and Step 2 and higher
Run-Up Test each individual unit pump/ →Engine Run-Up Test EECU s/w (for ASET™ AC engines) only. Please see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
injector pair to diagnose low IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32.
power complaints and
problems with rough running. When the test is active, the system automatically cuts out each cylinder. The
engine ECU then injects fuel at a fixed rate through the remaining five cylinders
and measures the acceleration rate.
The test will be performed 18 times, three times for each cylinder. Once
completed, the acceleration rates can be compared to determine if one of the
cylinders has a fuel delivery problem. Results should be compared from
cylinder to cylinder for that engine, rather than from engine to engine.
NOTE: To run this test, the engine must be running, the transmission in neutral
with the clutch pedal released and the parking brake set.
Fault Checks for active and inactive →Monitor Parameters If an active fault is detected during a live monitoring session, the Fault Status
Monitoring faults during monitoring. →Next (Parameter Monitoring) item on the display screen will change from “No Faults Noted” to “Fault Noted.”
During Live This message will remain on the display screen until the fault becomes inactive.
Parameter
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Monitoring
Fault Logs detailed information →Active Faults or Controller Fault For Step 8 and higher VECU s/w. Please see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Reporter during and around the time Table IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32.
when a fault occurs. →Fault Reporter
The Fault Reporter will log information about vehicle conditions when a fault
occurs if set in Occurrence Mode. Or, Fault Reporter will log information about
vehicle conditions just before a fault occurs if set in History Mode.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions
Fault Selects the type of operating → Diagnostics For Step 8 and higher VECU s/w. Please see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Reporter mode to record faults. →Configure Fault Reporter IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32.
Advanced (Advanced Setup)
Setup NOTE: Only the third and fourth MID filters can be changed by the operator (the
default is ALL). The first and second MID filters are limited to personnel who
have expertise in J1587 protocol.
The Fault Reporter will record faults from all devices on the J1587 line (for
example, ABS/ATC, transmission controller, headway controller and so on).
8_341.bk Page 37 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Fault Allows the user to configure → Diagnostics For Step 8 and higher VECU s/w. Please see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Reporter the Fault Reporter to run under →Configure Fault Reporter IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32 .
Configuration Occurrence Mode or History
Mode. In Occurrence Mode, select what type of faults to capture by defining MID, PID,
and FMI filters for up to 4 fault records. In History Mode, select what type of
faults to capture and the snapshot time between recorded records. With
Occurrence Mode*, define how long a record should be “saved” before being
overwritten.
*NOTE: If there is an intermittent power loss, historical data can be lost if in
History Mode.
Live Allows the user to monitor the →Monitor Parameters Once all desired parameters have been selected, click on the Next button to
Parameter current selection of begin monitoring.
Monitoring parameters. Parameter values
are continuously updated as NOTE: If an active fault occurs, indicating that a certain parameter value is
information is received on the incorrect or is not being generated by the controller, the word “FAULT” will
J1587 serial data line. appear. The data for that parameter will return as soon as the fault becomes
inactive.
NOTE: If all parameters remain constant when it is suspected that some should
change, check that the serial data line has not become disconnected.
Refer to the “Parameter Selection” sections for details concerning parameter
selection.
Parameter Allows the user to select the →Monitor Parameters Click on the Default Selections button.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Selection current default parameters for


(Using Default monitoring. NOTE: Once the default parameters have been selected, they can be modified
Selections) by clicking on desired parameters.
Refer to the “Live Parameter Monitoring” function for instructions on monitoring
parameters.
Parameter Allows the user to select →Monitor Parameters Click on the desired parameter. A check mark will appear in the box, indicating
Selection individual parameters for that it has been selected.
(Using SAE monitoring. A maximum of 30
Parameter parameters can be selected. To deselect a parameter, click on the parameter again (the check mark will
Menu) disappear).
Refer to the “Live Parameter Monitoring” function for instructions on monitoring
parameters.

Page 37
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions

Page 38
Paused Allows the user to freeze the →Monitor Parameters To pause monitoring, click on the Pause button.
Parameter display with the current →Next (Parameter Monitoring)
Monitoring parameter values on the To return to live monitoring, click on the Play button.
screen.
Predictive Oil Examines the operation of the →Diagnostics This feature is available for E-Tech™ engines with 1MS349 VECU s/w and for
Change vehicle since the last oil →Vehicle Data Log Display ASET™ AI engines with 1MS364 VECU s/w and 1MS371 data file only and
change to determine when the requires GuardDog™ installation or an oil change lamp.
oil should next be changed.
As a standalone feature, Predictive Oil Change is available for CL, CV, DM,
DMM, RD and RB models with Step 8, 1MS336 or higher VECU s/w.
8_341.bk Page 38 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

To operate this feature, enable Predictive Oil in OEM Data on the MACK
database via the F3 Update Option screen of V-MAC.
NOTE: Predictive Oil can be enabled or disabled only when the Oil Change or
Oil & Filter Change maintenance items are reset.
NOTE: This feature is not available for MR and LE models and vehicles with an
ASET™ AC engine.
NOTE: Predictive Oil is suited for chassis only that meet the following
requirements:
r The engine is equipped with a 28-quart oil pan.
r A Mack filtration system is used with dual full flow elements and a
Centri-Max® spinner filter.
r The engine was approved EO-M+ oil.
r Oil consumption is 3000 miles per quart or better.
r The engine does not have a problem with oil dilution.
Printing Allows the user to print →Utilities 1. Click on the Print Parameter Snapshot(s) button to bring up the
Display snapshots that were created Parameter Snapshot selection screen.
Screen during parameter monitoring.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Snapshots 2. Select the appropriate file.

Printing Fault Allows the user to print a →Fault Codes 1. Click on the Print button.
Tables snapshot of the current fault →Fault Table
table. 2. Follow the instructions in the Print menu.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions
Resetting the Allows the user to reset the →Diagnostics Click on the Reset button. Then choose the maintenance item(s) to be reset.
Maintenance Maintenance Monitor →Vehicle Data Log Display
Data Log schedule. NOTE: Up to 15 maintenance items can be reset.
If the Predictive Oil Change feature (see Predictive Oil Change) is installed, the
user can enable or disable the feature following a reset of the Oil Change
maintenance item or the Oil & Filter Change maintenance item.
Resetting the Allows the user to reset vehicle →Diagnostics Click on the Reset button.
Vehicle Data trip information. →Vehicle Data Log Display
8_341.bk Page 39 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Log
Saving Allows the user to save the →Monitor Parameters Once all of the desired parameters have been selected, click on the Save as
Default current selections as the Default button to save the current selections to the default file.
Selections default.
Saving Allows the user to save the →Utilities 1. Click on the Save Default Settings button to bring up the Default File
Parameter current settings to the default Location entry form.
Defaults file.
2. In the Default File Location entry form, enter the correct path for the data
file and click on the OK button (if the default path is correct, click on the
OK button).
NOTE: Do not rename the default file.
Saving the Allows the user to save the →Diagnostics Click on the Save button.
Maintenance current Maintenance Monitor →Vehicle Data Log Display
Data Log schedule. NOTE: The data file for the maintenance data log will be named
vmxxxxxx.mtn (where “xxxxxx” stands for the vehicle serial number).
Saving the Allows the user to save life and →Diagnostics Click on the Save button.
Vehicle Data vehicle trip information logged →Vehicle Data Log Display
Log by DataMax™. NOTE: The data file for the vehicle data log will be named vmxxxxxx.trp
(where “xxxxxx” stands for the vehicle serial number).
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Page 39
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions

Page 40
Selecting Permits user to select a →Utilities 1. Click on the Preferences button.
Datalink datalink adapter. →Preferences
2. Click on the Common tab.
Adapter →Common Entry Form
3. Determine your adapter type. To modify the non-RP1210A-compliant
adapter type selection, do the following:
a. Click on the Mack Default radio button.
b. Click on the Port Number drop-down arrow and select the port
number desired.
To modify the RP1210A-compliant adapter type selection, do the
following:
8_341.bk Page 40 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

a. Click on the RP1210A Device Name radio button.


b. Click on the Device Name drop-down arrow and select the adapter
desired.
c. Click on the Port drop-down arrow and select the com port desired.
d. Click on the Protocol drop-down arrow and select the protocol type
desired (protocol J1708 is recommended).
4. Click on the Apply button to make the change.
5. Click on the OK button to save changes.
VGT Vane Calibrates the VGT vane →Special Diagnostic Modes This test is available for Step 2 and higher EECU s/w (for ASET™ AC engines)
Position position actuator. →VGT Vane Position Calibration only. Please see table on page 32.
Calibration
This test aids in determining whether boost pressure or power complaints are
due to incorrect calibration.
To use the VGT vane position calibration, the engine must be off, the ignition
key turned to the ON position, and the coolant temperature above 140°F.
Primary and secondary air pressure must be at least 110 psi. The actuator
requires 95 psi to reach 100% vane position.
NOTE: If the turbocharger is too hot to touch, the engine should be idled and
then permitted to cool before the calibration is performed.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

If the actuator does not visibly reach its 100% stopped position, the test results
have failed, even if the diagnostic tool reports a successful test. Either the air
pressure is too low or the mechanism is binding and must be replaced.
Viewing Allows the user to view faults →Fault Codes The number of currently active faults will appear in the Total number of faults for
Active Faults that are presently occurring. →Active Faults display field. If there are more than 4 active faults, the scroll bar will appear.
Each fault description
identifies the controller NOTE: If a displayed fault becomes inactive, it will be displayed as inactive
responsible, severity, physical temporarily and then will be removed.
description, blink code
(including MID, PID/SID and
FMI) and current status of the
fault.
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions
Viewing Allows the user to view →Diagnostics This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU s/w and EECU s/w, or
Adaptive detected fault in active cruise →Adaptive Cruise Control Status Step 2 and higher EECU s/w (for ASET™ AC engines) only. Please see “STEP/
Cruise control. SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32.
Control Status
NOTE: When an Adaptive Cruise Control fault occurs, all cruise functions will
be disabled. The user may disable Adaptive Cruise Control and re-enable
standard cruise control, which requires reprogramming the VECU.
NOTE: The driver should be notified when standard cruise is operational
without the adaptive feature.
8_341.bk Page 41 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Eaton® SmartCruise® (optional) will decrease vehicle speed when it detects


that the vehicle is too close to a preceding vehicle. SmartCruise will resume
cruise speed when the proper minimum distance is re-established.
This screen displays the current status of active fault if SmartCruise or cruise
control is not operational. A fault message will occur if SmartCruise (in vehicles
equipped with SmartCruise) is defective.
Viewing Allows the user to view →Utilities 1. Click on the Display Parameter Snapshot(s) button to bring up the
Display snapshots that were created Parameter Snapshot selection screen.
Screen during parameter monitoring.
Snapshots 2. Select the appropriate file.

Viewing Allows the user to view →Diagnostics Vehicle information includes VECU (software version, data file number and
Electronic information concerning the →Vehicle Information serial number), vehicle serial number, VIN and unit number.
Configuration electronic configuration of the
Information V-MAC system. Engine information includes EECU (software version, data file number and
serial number), rated power, rated speed, engine model and serial number.
Viewing Fault Allows the user to select and →Fault Codes The number of currently inactive faults will appear in the Total number of faults
Tables view the fault table of a specific →Controller Fault Table in table field. If there are more than 4 faults, the scroll bar will appear.
controller.
NOTE: In order to view a fault table, the engine must be OFF with the key in the
A fault table is a history of all ON position.
faults that a controller has
detected since the table was NOTE: If a fault occurs after the fault table is cleared and before the power to
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

last cleared. the controller is cycled (turned OFF and then ON again), the fault may not be
entered into the controller’s fault table. Therefore, a request to view the fault
Each fault history includes the table immediately after it has been cleared may not accurately display faults
fault description (controller that occurred after the table was cleared. To view faults that occurred after
responsible, severity, physical clearing the table, use the Active Faults selection from the Fault menu.
description, blink code and
current status) and the number
of times the fault was logged
(up to a maximum of 15).
Viewing Allows the user to view the →Diagnostics The types of programming histories include OEM, Customer data programming,
Programming programming history for each →Programming History Vehicle data programming and Fleet data programming.
Histories of the controllers.

Page 41
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions

Page 42
Viewing the Allows the user to view the →Diagnostics Refer to the Maintenance Monitor section in CUSTOMER DATA
Maintenance status of the Maintenance →Maintenance Data Log Display PROGRAMMING for more information concerning maintenance schedules.
Data Log Monitor schedule (i.e., Before
Next and Since Last). If the Predictive Oil Change feature (see Predictive Oil Change) is installed and
enabled, the Oil & Filter Change maintenance item data will be replaced with
Predictive Oil Change maintenance item data.
If the GuardDog™ maintenance function (see GuardDog™ Enabled) is enabled,
the status of the GuardDog™ maintenance items will be displayed at the bottom
of the log, following the 15 standard Maintenance items. Please see “STEP/
SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32.
8_341.bk Page 42 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Viewing the Allows the user to view the →Diagnostics NOTE: If the ignition is cycled — turned OFF and then ON again — while
Switch Status current status of all V-MAC →Switch Status Display monitoring the switch status, the display update will stop and an error message
Display control switches. This feature will appear.
is useful for diagnosing wiring
problems. If the switch has been reassigned (using the Switch Assignments feature in
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING), the logical status of the new operation
The first column of the Switch will be displayed.
Status display screen shows
the physical status. This Example: If the Engine Brake Low switch on the instrument panel is in the ON
reflects the primary operation position, the Switch Status display screen should indicate that the physical
of the switch. status of the switch (Engine Brake Low) is “On”.

The second column shows the Now assume that the Engine Brake Low switch has been reassigned to function
logical status. This reflects any as the PTO 3 switch. In this case, the physical status of Engine Brake Low
additional operations that the should be “On,” however the logical status of Engine Brake Low should be “Off”
switch performs. and the logical status of PTO 3 should be “Engaged”.
If the Brake Pad sensors (see GuardDog™ Enabled) are installed as part of the
GuardDog™ maintenance feature, the physical switches — Aux.1 and Spare —
are replaced with brake pads, front and brake pads, rear, respectively.
The Air Restriction switch, Washer Fluid Level switch, and the Parking Brake 2
switch have been added to the physical switch list (for Step 8 and higher VECU
s/w, see “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

32).
Viewing the Allows the user to view life and →Diagnostics For a summary of vehicle life and trip information, refer to the DataMax™
Vehicle Data vehicle trip information. →Vehicle Data Log Display Summary Information.
Log
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions
Wiggle Wire Enables Wiggle Wire Mode. →Special Diagnostic Modes For Step 5 systems, the Wiggle Wire Test is supported in the VECU only. For
Test →Wiggle Wire Test Step 8 and higher VECU and EECU s/w and Step 2 and higher EECU s/w (for
This test increases the ASET™ AC engines), the Wiggle Wire Test is supported in both the VECU and
system’s sensitivity to faults on EECU. This test helps to shorten the diagnostic times on the following VECU-
sensors and wiring. When supported sensors:
troubleshooting an intermittent
problem, placing the system in r Accelerator Pedal: J3-4, J3-5, J3-6
Wiggle Wire Mode — and then
“wiggling” the wires in the r Electronic Malfunction Lamp: J3-9
vicinity of the offending sensor
8_341.bk Page 43 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

r Engine Shutdown Lamp: J3-8


or circuit while monitoring
faults — will help identify the r Exhaust Temperature: J2-7, J2-8
problem circuit. r Front Drive Axle Temperature: J2-1, J2-3
r Rear Drive Axle Temperature: J2-4, J2-1
r Fuel Level: J1-18
r Road Speed Sensor: J2-11, J2-12
r Speedometer: J1-3
r Tachometer: J1-4
r Transmission Oil Temperature: J2-1, J2-2
(List continued on next page)
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

Page 43
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location Instructions

Page 44
For Step 8 and higher EECU s/w and Step 2 and higher EECU s/w (for ASET™
AC engines), this test helps to shorten the diagnostic times on the following
EECU-supported sensors (please refer to above list for VECU-supported
sensors):
r *Aftercooler Outlet Air Temperature: J2-84
r Ambient Air Temperature: J2-27, J2-29, *J2-68
r *Boost Pressure: J2-35, J2-49, J2-50
r *Combustion Air Humidity-Temperature: J2-30, J2-47, J2-83 (for Air
Humidity) and J2-65 (for Air Temperature)
8_341.bk Page 44 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

r *Compressor Discharge Temperature: J2-67, J2-85


r Coolant Temperature: J1-17, J1-26, *J2-86, *J2-87
r *EGR Valve Drive: J2-16, J2-17
r Engine Coolant Level: *J1-11, *J1-12, *J1-13, J2-3, J2-26
r Engine Oil Level: J1-1, J1-13, *J2-21, *J2-22
r Engine Oil Pressure: J1-25, J1-32, J1-34, *J2-25, *J2-28, *J2-45
r Engine Oil Temperature: J1-5, J1-26, *J2-64, *J2-81, *J2-82
r Exhaust Brake: J1-39
r Fan Clutch: J1-9
r Fuel Temperature: J1-26, J1-28, *J2-81
r Inlet Air Pressure: J1-15, J1-35, J1-36
r Inlet Manifold Temperature: J1-2, J1-26, *J2-61, *J2-80
r *VGT Turbocharger Vane Position: J2-26, J2-51, J2-69
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS

r Wastegate Output: J1-8


* For Step 2 and higher EECU s/w for ASET™ AC engines only.
8_341.bk Page 45 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
DataMax™ Summary Information
DataMax™ vehicle life and trip data summary
information is defined/calculated according to the
following chart.

DataMax™ Item Definition/Calculation


Active Fault Occurrences Number of times an Engine or Vehicle ECU fault was active.
Active Fault Time Amount of time an Engine or Vehicle ECU fault was active.
Average Cruise Speed Cruise distance ÷ cruise time
Average Driving Speed Distance ÷ vehicle moving time
Average Speed Distance ÷ key switch ON occurrences
Cranking Time (Step 5 and Amount of time that the starter was ON.
above)
Cruise Fuel Economy Cruise distance ÷ cruise fuel
Delayed Idle Fuel + Fuel consumed during delayed (qualified) idle.
Delayed Idle Time + Amount of time that a delayed (qualified) idle occurred. Delayed (qualified) idle is the
time that the vehicle idles after exceeding the Idle Logging Delay threshold.
Distance Distance covered by the vehicle (all conditions).
Distance in Cruise Control Distance covered while cruise control was active.
Distance Traveled in Engine Distance traveled while engine is running at its most efficient speed.
Sweet Spot @
Driving Fuel Economy Distance ÷ vehicle moving fuel
Engine Overspeed Company Maximum engine speed exceeded over the Engine Overspeed, Company Limit
Threshold — Max threshold, yet was below the Engine Overspeed (Severe) threshold. Life information only.
Engine Overspeed Company Amount of time that engine speed exceeded the Engine Overspeed, Company Limit
Threshold Time threshold, yet was below the Engine Overspeed (Severe) threshold.
NOTE: The company threshold is the value that the driver is instructed not to exceed,
usually to promote good fuel economy.
Engine Revolutions Engine revolutions (within 100).
Engine Running Fuel Fuel consumed by the engine.
Engine Running Time Amount of time that the engine was running.
Fan Clutch Cycles Number of times the fan turned ON. Life information only.
Fuel Used in Cruise Control Fuel consumed while cruise control was active.
Fuel Used in Engine Sweet Spot Amount of fuel used while engine is running at its most efficient speed.
@
Fueled Engine Overspeed Time* Amount of time that engine speed exceeded the Engine Overspeed with Fuel threshold
while fuel was being delivered to the engine, either via cruise control or the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE: This value will continue to log, even if the engine speed exceeds the Engine
Overspeed, All Conditions or Engine Overspeed (Severe) threshold, provided that fuel is
still being delivered to the engine.
Fueled Vehicle Overspeed Time Amount of time that vehicle speed exceeded the Vehicle Overspeed with Fuel threshold
while fuel was being delivered to the engine, either via cruise control or the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE: This value will continue to log, even if the vehicle speed exceeds the Vehicle
Overspeed, All Conditions threshold, provided that fuel is still being delivered to the
engine.
Hand Throttle Distance Distance traveled while the hand throttle was active.
Hand Throttle Fuel Fuel consumed while the hand throttle was active.

Page 45
8_341.bk Page 46 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
DataMax™ Item Definition/Calculation
Hand Throttle Time Amount of time that the hand throttle was active. Hand throttle is considered active when
speed control is active, all four PTOs are OFF and vehicle speed is less than the Hand
Throttle Max Road Speed threshold.
Hard Braking Occurrences Number of times that vehicle deceleration exceeded the Hard Braking threshold.
Idle Fuel Fuel consumed during idle.
Idle Time Engine is running and vehicle speed is zero.
Key Switch ON Occurrences Number of times that the ECU was powered up.
Maximum Engine Speed* Maximum engine speed for the current vehicle trip and life of the vehicle. Life information
only.
Maximum Vehicle Speed* Maximum vehicle speed for the current vehicle trip and life of the vehicle. Life information
only.
Moving PTO 1 Distance Distance covered while PTO 1 was ON, the engine was running, and the vehicle was
moving.
Moving PTO 1 Fuel Fuel used while PTO 1 was ON, the engine was running, and the vehicle was moving.
Moving PTO 1 Time Time that PTO 1 was ON, the engine was running, and the vehicle was moving.
Moving PTO 2 Distance Distance covered while PTO 2 was ON, the engine was running, and the vehicle was
moving.
Moving PTO 2 Fuel Fuel consumed while PTO 2 was ON, the engine was running, and the vehicle was
moving.
Moving PTO 2 Time Time that PTO 2 was ON, the engine was running, and the vehicle was moving.
PTO 1 Fuel Fuel used while PTO 1 was ON and the engine was running (includes Moving PTO 1
Fuel).
PTO 1 Time Amount of time that PTO 1 was ON and the engine was running (includes Moving PTO 1
Time). PTO speed control does not have to be ON.
PTO 2 Fuel Fuel used while PTO 2 was ON and the engine was running (includes Moving PTO 2
Fuel).
PTO 2 Time Amount of time that PTO 2 was ON and the engine was running (includes Moving PTO 2
Time). PTO speed control does not have to be ON.
Severe Engine Overspeed Number of times that engine speed exceeded the Engine Overspeed (Severe) threshold
Occurrences (indicating abuse of the engine). Life information only.
Severe Engine Overspeed — Max Maximum engine speed in excess of the Engine Overspeed (Severe) threshold
Value (indicating abuse of the engine). Life information only.
Time in Cruise Control Amount of time that cruise control was active. With the exception of Step 6 and earlier
systems, cruise control is not considered active when it is cancelled with the clutch or
service brake.
Time in Sweet Spot Amount of time while engine is running at its most efficient speed.
Total Fuel All fuel used.
Total Fuel Economy Distance ÷ total fuel
Traction Loss Occurrences Number of times that vehicle acceleration exceeded the Traction Loss threshold.
True Idle Fuel Fuel used during true idle.
True Idle Time Amount of time that a true idle occurred. During true idle: PTO 1 and PTO 2 are OFF,
speed control is disabled, the engine is running, accelerator pedal position is less than
2% and vehicle speed is 0 mph.
NOTE: PTO 3 and PTO 4 are not considered when calculating true idle.
Vehicle Moving Fuel Fuel consumed while the vehicle is moving.
Vehicle Moving Time Amount of time that the vehicle was moving.
Vehicle Overspeed — Max Maximum vehicle speed in excess of the Vehicle Overspeed, All Conditions threshold.
Life information only.

Page 46
8_341.bk Page 47 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
DataMax™ Item Definition/Calculation
Vehicle Overspeed Occurrences Number of times that vehicle speed exceeded the Vehicle Overspeed, All Conditions
threshold.
Vehicle Overspeed Time Amount of time that vehicle speed exceeded the Vehicle Overspeed, All Conditions
threshold.
Vehicle Time Amount of time that the key was in the ON position.
% Cruise Distance (Cruise distance ÷ distance) x 100
% Cruise Fuel (Cruise fuel ÷ total fuel) x 100
% Cruise Time (Cruise time ÷ vehicle time) x 100
% Delayed Idle Fuel (Delayed idle fuel ÷ total fuel) x 100
% Delayed Idle Time (Delayed idle time ÷ total time) x 100
% Distance in Sweet Spot Sweet Spot distance ÷ distance
% Driving Time (Vehicle moving time ÷ vehicle time) x 100
% Fuel Used in Sweet Spot (Sweet Spot fuel ÷ total fuel) x 100
% Idle Fuel (Idle fuel ÷ total fuel) x 100
% Idle Time (Idle time ÷ vehicle time) x 100
% PTO Distance — All ([Sum of all PTO moving distance] x 100) ÷ distance
% PTO Fuel — All ([PTO 1 fuel ÷ PTO 2 fuel] x 100) ÷ total fuel
% PTO Time — All ([PTO 1 time ÷ PTO 2 time] x 100) ÷ key switch ON occurrences
% Time in Sweet Spot (Sweet Spot time ÷ vehicle time) x 100
% True Idle Fuel (True idle fuel ÷ total fuel) x 100
% True Idle Time (True idle time ÷ vehicle time) x 100

+Delayed Idle is defined as the total amount of idle time that is accumulated after a predefined delay period has expired. This is
intended for future use in driver incentive programs where an appropriate amount of “free idle” time is granted due to traffic
lights, etc.
* Items are not available on V-MAC III 1MS312/312A software.
@ Items are not available on V-MAC III 1MS312/312A or 1MS316/316A software.

Page 47
8_341.bk Page 48 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

NOTES

Page 48
8_341.bk Page 49 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 49
8_341.bk Page 50 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


CUSTOMER DATA Password Protection
PROGRAMMING ENTERING THE PASSWORD
INTRODUCTION 43

About Customer Data Programming


The V-MAC system offers a variety of customer
options and features which can be programmed
using CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING.

Although this version of CUSTOMER DATA


PROGRAMMING can be used to program both
V-MAC II and V-MAC III systems, the
programming instructions contained in this
manual were designed to support V-MAC III. For Figure 43 — Password Entry Screen
V-MAC II user information, refer to the online help
and the V-MAC II User’s Guide (8-302). Many of the options available in CUSTOMER
DATA PROGRAMMING are protected by a
Programming Access security screen. To access
Accessing Customer Data the selected option, enter the appropriate
Programming password.

There are two ways to access CUSTOMER DATA A password can be any combination of numbers
PROGRAMMING. and/or letters and is not case sensitive. However,
the password will be transferred to the vehicle in
r If there is a Mack Software folder on the upper case regardless if lower or higher case
desktop, double-click on the folder. Then letters are used. There are four different types of
select the CUSTOMER DATA passwords organized according to where the
PROGRAMMING icon. information is stored.
r If there is no icon on the desktop, access the
start menu, select Programs and select For information stored in the vehicle ECU, there
Mack Programs. Then select Customer are three areas for passwords:
Data Programming. r Vehicle Data
r Customer Data
Online Help Function
r Fleet Data
This version of V-MAC support software features
an online help function (similar to Windows Help). For information stored in the engine ECU, there is
The online help includes all of the information one area for password:
contained in this user’s guide. Simply press F1 to r Customer Data
view the help topics.
Once the appropriate password has been entered
Additional Information into the field, click on the OK button to continue
programming.
The current V-MAC III Service Manual, 8-211,
provides a complete description of the operation
of the V-MAC III system, as well as instructions
for performing diagnostics and repairs of system
components.

The phone number for the V-MAC Software


Support Center is (800) 247-0039. Hours are
8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. (Eastern time), Monday
through Friday.

Page 50
8_341.bk Page 51 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


CHANGING THE PASSWORD CUSTOMER DATA
To change the current password, enter the PROGRAMMING VISUAL
current password into the field and click on the IDENTIFICATION
box next to the Change Password field.
44
Refer to Customer Data Programming for
Windows (Version 2.6) Feature Location Flow
Chart for V-MAC III, Step 4 (8-341-2) and above
for an overview of CUSTOMER DATA
PROGRAMMING features and functions.

Screen Summaries
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING MENU
The Customer Data Programming Menu offers
Figure 44 — Password Change Screen you 10 choices.
45

1. Enter the new password in the New


Password field.
2. Re-enter the new password in the Verify
Password field.
3. Click on the OK button.

Figure 45 — Customer Data Programming Menu

A line in the lower right side of the screen


displays information concerning the type of
engine installed. If an Eaton® Super 10 Top 2 or
Allison HD transmission is installed, that
information will also be displayed.

A line in the lower left side of the screen displays


the Programming Tool ID hard drive serial
number, used for programming history.

Page 51
8_341.bk Page 52 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


Click on the View/Print Current Parameters VIEW/PRINT REPORT SELECTION SCREEN
button to view or print current parameters (refer to
The View/Print Report Selection screen,
“VIEW/PRINT REPORT SELECTION SCREEN”
accessed from the Customer Data Programming
on page 52).
Menu, lets you view and/or print the current
customer parameters which are stored in the
Click on the Program Vehicle Component
V-MAC module. No password is needed to select
Parameters button to program vehicle
this option because only viewing, not modifying,
component parameters (refer to “PROGRAM
the data is allowed.
VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS ENTRY 46
FORM” on page 53).

Click on the Customer Data/Vehicle ECU button


to program customer parameters stored in the
vehicle ECU (refer to “VEHICLE ECU
CUSTOMER DATA MENU” on page 53).

Click on the Customer Data/Engine ECU button


to program customer parameters stored in the
engine ECU (refer to “ENGINE ECU CUSTOMER
DATA ENTRY FORM” on page 54).

Click on the Program Fleet Data button to


program fleet parameters (refer to “FLEET DATA
MENU” on page 54).

Click on the Edit Owner Storage button to edit Figure 46 — View/Print Report Screen
the Owner Storage entry form (refer to “EDIT
OWNER STORAGE ENTRY FORM” on page Click on the Select Report to View button to call
55). up the Select Report to View pop-up screen.
Click on the Maintenance Monitor button to Click on the View button to see the current
program Maintenance Monitor schedules (refer to selection.
“MAINTENANCE MONITOR ENTRY FORM” on
page 55). Click on the Print/Save Report(s) button to print
the current selection.
Click on the Program Unit Pump Calibration
button to calibrate the unit pumps (refer to “UNIT r Select Vehicle Data & Settings to view/print
PUMP CALIBRATION ENTRY FORM” on page the Vehicle Data & Settings display screen.
56). r Select General & Vocational Settings to
view/print the General & Vocational Settings
Click on the Set Time and Date button to set the display screen.
VECU time and date (refer to “SET TIME AND
DATE SCREEN” on page 56). r Select Cruise Control Parameters to view/
print the Cruise Control Parameters display
Click on the Preferences button to set the screen.
configuration of the software (refer to
“PREFERENCES ENTRY FORM” on page 57).

Click on the Quit button to exit the program.

Page 52
8_341.bk Page 53 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


r Select Electronic Hand Throttle VEHICLE ECU CUSTOMER DATA MENU
Parameters to view/print the Electronic
The Vehicle ECU Customer Data Menu,
Hand Throttle Parameters display screen.
accessed from the Customer Data Programming
r Select PTO Parameters to view/print the Menu, offers you nine choices in where you can
PTO Parameters display screen. program features and options associated with
customer data.
r Select Shutdown Parameters to view/print 48
the Shutdown Parameters display screen.
r Select Cab Fan Controls to view/print the
Cab Fan Controls display screen.
r Select Fleet Data Settings to view/print the
Fleet Data Settings display screen.
r Select Engine ECU Customer Data to
view/print the Engine ECU Customer Data
display screen.

Click on the Cancel button to return to the


Customer Data Programming menu.

PROGRAM VEHICLE COMPONENT


PARAMETERS ENTRY FORM
47
Figure 48 — Vehicle ECU Customer Data Menu

Click on the General Features button to program


general features (refer to “GENERAL FEATURES
ENTRY FORM” on page 57).

Click on the Shutdown Options button to


program shutdown options (refer to
“SHUTDOWN OPTIONS ENTRY FORM” on
page 57).

Click on the Vocational Features button to


program vocation features (refer to
“VOCATIONAL FEATURES ENTRY FORM” on
page 58).

Click on the Cab Fan Control Options button to


Figure 47 — Program Vehicle Component Parameters program cab fan controls (refer to “CAB FAN
Entry Form CONTROLS ENTRY FORM” on page 58).
This entry form, accessed from the Customer
Data Programming Menu, is used to program
various vehicle component parameters and
features. The allowable limits for each feature are Cab Fan Control options are only available for
displayed at the bottom of the screen. For Step 5 and above.
detailed features descriptions, refer to the
“VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS” table Click on the Program Cruise Control button to
on page 66. program cruise control options (refer to “CRUISE
CONTROL OPTIONS ENTRY FORM” on page
58).

Page 53
8_341.bk Page 54 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


This entry form, accessed from the Customer
Data Programming Menu, is used to program
parameters stored in the EECU. The allowable
When Program Cruise Control Options is limits for each feature are displayed at the bottom
selected, a program status screen may appear. of the screen. For detailed feature descriptions,
This is a warning to make sure that PTO 2 is refer to the “CUSTOMER DATA/EECU
turned OFF before changing cruise settings. FEATURES” table on page 94.

Click on the Electronic Hand Throttle Settings FLEET DATA MENU


button to program electronic hand throttle settings
The Fleet Data Menu, accessed from the
(refer to “ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE
Customer Data Programming Menu, offers six
SETTINGS ENTRY FORM” on page 59).
choices where you can program parameters and
settings associated with fleet data.
Click on the PTO Speed Control Settings button 50
to program standard settings for all PTOs (refer to
“PTO SPEED CONTROL SETTINGS ENTRY
FORM” on page 59).

Click on the PTO 1-2 Custom Control Settings


button to program custom settings for PTO 1 and
PTO 2 (refer to “PTO 1-2 CUSTOM SETTINGS
ENTRY FORM” on page 59).

Click on the PTO 3-4 Custom Control Settings


button to program custom settings for PTO 3 and
PTO 4 (refer to “PTO 3-4 CUSTOM SETTINGS
ENTRY FORM” on page 60).

Click on the Return to main menu button to


return to the Customer Data Programming menu.
Figure 50 — Fleet Data Menu
ENGINE ECU CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM
49 Click on the Fleet Theft Deterrence Settings
button to program theft deterrence parameters
(refer to “THEFT DETERRENCE PARAMETERS
ENTRY FORM” on page 60).

Click on the Fleet Display and Trip Settings


button to program display and trip settings (refer
to “FLEET DISPLAY AND TRIP PARAMETERS
ENTRY FORM” on page 60).

Click on the Fleet Driver Event Settings button


to program driver event settings (refer to “FLEET
DRIVER EVENT SETTINGS ENTRY FORM” on
page 60).

Click on the Incident Log Filter and Trigger


Settings button to program incident log filter and
Figure 49 — Engine ECU Customer Data Entry Form
trigger settings (refer to “INCIDENT LOG FILTER
AND TRIGGER SETTINGS ENTRY FORM” on
page 61).

Page 54
8_341.bk Page 55 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


Click on the Maintenance Customer Defined MAINTENANCE MONITOR ENTRY FORM
Labels button to program the customer defined
The Maintenance Monitor Entry Form, accessed
labels that are used in the Maintenance Monitor
from the Customer Data Programming Menu,
(refer to “MAINTENANCE CUSTOMER
allows you to program the Maintenance Monitor
DEFINED LABELS ENTRY FORM” on page 61).
schedule.
52
Click on the Driver ID Settings button to program
driver ID settings (refer to “DRIVER ID
SETTINGS ENTRY FORM” on page 61).

Click on the Return to main menu button to


return to the Customer Data Programming menu.

EDIT OWNER STORAGE ENTRY FORM


51

Figure 52 — Maintenance Monitor Entry Form

Click on the Load Defaults button to view and


choose from three predefined maintenance
intervals, (Line Haul Type 1 Defaults, Line Haul
Type 2 Defaults or Short Haul Defaults).

Click on the OK button to view selections.

Figure 51 — Edit Owner Storage Entry Form


Click on the Save/Exit button to save data in the
module. For detailed instructions, refer to the
This entry form, accessed from the Customer “CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
Data Programming Menu, is used to store FUNCTIONS” table on page 65.
customer information. For detailed instructions,
refer to the “CUSTOMER DATA
PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS” table on page
65.

Page 55
8_341.bk Page 56 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


UNIT PUMP CALIBRATION ENTRY FORM SET TIME AND DATE SCREEN
53 55

Figure 53 — Unit Pump Calibration Entry Form


(ASET™ AI Engine)

Unit Pump Calibration Entry Form


(for ASET™ AC Engine)
54

Figure 55 — Set Time and Date Screen

This screen, accessed from the Customer Data


Programming Menu, is used to set the vehicle
time and date to the PC time and date. For
detailed instructions, refer to the “CUSTOMER
DATA PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS” table on
page 65.

The time and date settings are not retained in


VECU memory if power to the VECU is lost (for
Figure 54 — Unit Pump Calibration Entry Form (ASET™
AC Engine)
example, when the vehicle battery or the harness
connector is disconnected). Therefore, when
These entry forms, accessed from the Customer power is restored to the VECU (for example,
Data Programming Menu, are used to enter the reconnecting the battery or the VECU harness
unit pump calibration codes. For detailed connector), reset the time and date before
instructions, refer to “CUSTOMER DATA returning the vehicle to service.
PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS” table on page
65.

The V.I.P.™ time setting can be changed using


the V.I.P.™ display without affecting the VECU
time and date settings.

Page 56
8_341.bk Page 57 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


PREFERENCES ENTRY FORM This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU
56 Customer Data Menu, is used to program general
features stored in the VECU. When applicable,
the allowable limits for a feature are displayed at
the bottom of the screen. For detailed feature
descriptions, refer to the “CUSTOMER DATA/
VECU — GENERAL FEATURES” table on page
71.

SHUTDOWN OPTIONS ENTRY FORM


58

Figure 56 — Preferences Entry Form


Figure 58 — Shutdown Options Entry Form
This entry form, accessed from the Customer
Data Programming Menu, is used to modify the This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU
PC configuration for serial communications and Customer Data Menu, is used to program idle
display. For detailed instructions, refer to shutdown. When applicable, the allowable limits
“SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION FIELDS” on for a feature are displayed at the bottom of the
page 7. screen. For detailed feature descriptions, refer to
the “CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN
OPTIONS” table on page 73.
GENERAL FEATURES ENTRY FORM
57

Figure 57 — General Features Entry Form

Page 57
8_341.bk Page 58 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


VOCATIONAL FEATURES ENTRY FORM This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU
59 Customer Data Menu, is used to program cab fan
parameters stored in the VECU. When
applicable, the allowable limits for a feature are
displayed at the bottom of the screen. For
detailed feature descriptions, refer to the
“CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CAB FAN
CONTROLS” table on page 81.

This option is available for Step 5 and above


systems only.

CRUISE CONTROL OPTIONS ENTRY FORM

Figure 59 — Vocational Features Entry Form

This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU When this option is selected, a program status
Customer Data Menu, is used to program screen may appear. This is a warning to make
vocational features stored in the VECU. When sure that PTO 2 is turned OFF before changing
applicable, the allowable limits for a feature are cruise settings.
displayed at the bottom of the screen. For 61
detailed features descriptions, refer to the
“CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — VOCATIONAL
FEATURES” table on page 79.

CAB FAN CONTROLS ENTRY FORM


60

Figure 61 — Cruise Control Entry Form

This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU


Customer Data Menu, is used to program cruise
control. When applicable, the allowable limits for
a feature are displayed at the bottom of the
screen. For detailed feature descriptions, refer to
Figure 60 — Cab Fan Controls Entry Form
the “CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CRUISE
CONTROL FEATURES” table on page 83.

Page 58
8_341.bk Page 59 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE SETTINGS This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU
ENTRY FORM Customer Data Menu, is used to program
62 standard features for each PTO. When
applicable, the allowable limits for a feature are
displayed at the bottom of the screen. For
detailed feature descriptions, refer to the
“CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — PTO SPEED
CONTROL SETTINGS” table on page 89.

PTO 1-2 CUSTOM SETTINGS ENTRY FORM


64

Figure 62 — Electronic Hand Throttle Settings Entry


Form

This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU


Customer Data Menu, is used to program the
electronic hand throttle. When applicable, the
allowable limits for a feature are displayed at the
bottom of the screen. For detailed feature
descriptions, refer to the “CUSTOMER DATA/
VECU — ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE Figure 64 — PTO 1-2 Custom Settings Entry Form
(EHT) FEATURES” table on page 85.
This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU
Customer Data Menu, is used to program custom
PTO SPEED CONTROL SETTINGS ENTRY settings for PTO 1 and PTO 2. When applicable,
FORM the allowable limits for each feature are displayed
63 at the bottom of the screen. For detailed feature
descriptions, refer to the “CUSTOMER DATA/
VECU — CUSTOM PTO SETTINGS” table on
page 91.

Figure 63 — PTO Speed Control Settings Entry Form

Page 59
8_341.bk Page 60 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


PTO 3-4 CUSTOM SETTINGS ENTRY FORM screen. For detailed feature descriptions, refer to
65 the the “FLEET DATA — THEFT DETERRENCE
FEATURES” table on page 98.

FLEET DISPLAY AND TRIP PARAMETERS


ENTRY FORM
67

Figure 65 — PTO 3-4 Custom Settings Entry Form

This entry form, accessed from the Vehicle ECU


Customer Data Menu, is used to program custom
settings for PTO 3 and PTO 4. When applicable,
the allowable limits for a feature are displayed at
Figure 67 — Fleet Display and Trip Parameters Entry
the bottom of the screen. For detailed feature Form
descriptions, refer to the “CUSTOMER DATA/
VECU — CUSTOM PTO SETTINGS” table on This entry form, accessed from the Fleet Data
page 91. Menu, is used to view fleet display and program
trip parameters. When applicable, the allowable
THEFT DETERRENCE PARAMETERS ENTRY limits for a feature are displayed at the bottom of
FORM the screen. For detailed feature descriptions,
66 refer to the “FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP
SETTINGS” table on page 100.

FLEET DRIVER EVENT SETTINGS ENTRY


FORM
68

Figure 66 — Theft Deterrence Parameters Entry Form

This entry form, accessed from the Fleet Data


Menu, is used to program theft deterrence
parameters. When applicable, the allowable limits
for a feature are displayed at the bottom of the Figure 68 — Fleet Driver Event Settings Entry Form

Page 60
8_341.bk Page 61 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


This entry form, accessed from the Fleet Data or engine speed greater than 50 rpm/sec. If both
Menu, is used to program driver event settings. are detected, an incident report is triggered. For
When applicable, the allowable limits for a feature more information, refer to the “FLEET DATA —
are displayed at the bottom of the screen. Driver INCIDENT LOG FILTER AND TRIGGER
events are records of things that drivers do during SETTINGS” table on page 111.
the normal course of their jobs. For example,
Driver Event data can report on how well drivers
MAINTENANCE CUSTOMER DEFINED
obey road and engine speed limits. This entry
LABELS ENTRY FORM
form is used in conjunction with InfoMax™ (if
70
available) to provide reports. For more
information, refer to the “FLEET DATA —
DRIVER EVENT SETTINGS” table on page 109.

INCIDENT LOG FILTER AND TRIGGER


SETTINGS ENTRY FORM
69

Figure 70 — Maintenance Customer Defined Labels


Entry Form

This entry form, accessed from the Fleet Data


Menu, is used to program customer defined
labels. For detailed feature descriptions, refer to
the “FLEET DATA — CUSTOMER DEFINED
Figure 69 — Incident Log Filter and Trigger Settings LABELS” table on page 114.
Entry Form

This entry form, accessed from the Fleet Data DRIVER ID SETTINGS ENTRY FORM
Menu, is used to program incident log filter and 71

trigger settings. When applicable, the allowable


limits for a feature are displayed at the bottom of
the screen. Vehicle Incidents contain information
about how a vehicle was being driven before and
after conditions have been detected by the
V-MAC module, suggesting that an accident or
other catastrophic event has occurred. This entry
form is used in conjunction with InfoMax™ (if
available) to provide reports.
A data logger generates the incident report on
board the vehicle. During normal operation, a
sample of vehicle speed, engine speed and the
state of up to eight switches are stored at a
programmable rate. This rate can be set using
Customer Data Programming. At another
programmable rate, the data logger determines Figure 71 — Driver ID Settings Entry Form
vehicle and engine speed by watching for a
change in vehicle speed greater than 10 mph/sec

Page 61
8_341.bk Page 62 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


This entry form, accessed from the Fleet Data Click on the Program Vehicle Component
Menu, is used to program driver ID and access Parameters button to program vehicle
level restrictions for each driver ID. For detailed component parameters (refer to “CUMMINS
feature descriptions, refer to the “FLEET DATA — VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS ENTRY
DRIVER ID SETTINGS” table on page 114. FORM” on page 63).

Click on the Edit Owner Storage button to edit


Cummins Screen Summaries the Owner Storage entry form (refer to “EDIT
The following screens will appear if the vehicle is OWNER STORAGE ENTRY FORM” on page
equipped with a Cummins engine. 55).

Click on the Set Time and Date button to set the


CUMMINS CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING VECU time and date (refer to “SET TIME AND
MENU DATE SCREEN” on page 56).
72

Click on the Utilities button to set the


configuration (refer to “PREFERENCES ENTRY
FORM” on page 57).

Click on the Quit button to exit the program.

CUMMINS VIEW/PRINT REPORT SELECTION


SCREEN
73

Figure 72 — Cummins Customer Data Programming


Menu

A line in the lower right side of the screen shows


that a Cummins Engine is installed.

Figure 73 — Cummins View/Print Selection Screen

A line in the lower left side of the screen displays Click on the Select Report to View button to call
the Programming Tool ID hard drive serial up the Select Report to View pop-up screen.
number, used for programming history.
Click on the View button to view the current
selection.
This menu lists the available programming
options for a vehicle equipped with a Cummins Click on the Print/Save Report(s) button to print
engine. the current selection.
Click on the View/Print Current Parameters r Select Vehicle Data & Settings to view/print
button to view or print current parameters (refer to the Vehicle Data & Settings display screen.
“CUMMINS VIEW/PRINT REPORT SELECTION
SCREEN” on page 62).

Page 62
8_341.bk Page 63 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


Click on the Cancel button to return to the Limited Time Mode
Customer Data Programming menu.
When this mode is enabled, the vehicle will start
CUMMINS VEHICLE COMPONENT without a valid access code but will shut down
PARAMETERS ENTRY FORM after 30 seconds unless a valid access code is
74
entered. In addition, engine power can be
restricted for the initial 30-second period. With
this mode of security, there is a time limit and
engine power is restricted. To use this mode of
security, enable the Demand ID to Continue
Running Beyond 30 Seconds feature (refer to the
“FLEET DATA — THEFT DETERRENCE
FEATURES” table on page 98).

ACCESS LEVEL RESTRICTIONS


The driver access code can be programmed with
specific restrictions, regardless of the security
mode selected. Four different levels of access
are available:

Full Access
Figure 74 — Vehicle Component Parameters Entry Form
This type of access code has no restrictions on
This entry form is used to program various power, driving time or distance.
vehicle component parameters and features. The
allowable limits for each feature are displayed at Limited Power Access
the bottom of the screen.
This type of access code allows the operator to
start the vehicle, but the vehicle will have
CUSTOMER DATA restricted power.
PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION
Limited Speed Access
AND OPERATION
This type of access code allows the operator to
Theft Deterrence System Summary start the vehicle, but the vehicle will have
The V-MAC III system has the ability to limit restricted road speed.
unauthorized vehicle use by requiring the driver
to enter an access code through the dash display Theft Access
unit.
This type of access code allows the operator
(usually a thief) to start and drive the vehicle with
SECURITY MODES full power. However, the engine will shut down
The V-MAC III theft deterrence system offers two after a specified time or distance. This level of
security modes for continued running. access is designed for emergency situations.
After the driver gives this code to a thief, the
Limited Power Mode vehicle will start and drive normally, but the
vehicle will shut down and can be recovered
When this mode is enabled, the vehicle will start without endangering personnel.
without a valid access code but will only run at
limited power. There is no time limit with this
mode, but engine power will be restricted. To use
this mode of security, enable the Demand Driver
ID to Operate feature (refer to the “FLEET DATA
— THEFT DETERRENCE FEATURES” table on
page 98).

Page 63
8_341.bk Page 64 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


Maintenance Monitor Summary PROGRAMMING MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

The V-MAC III system monitors maintenance The Maintenance Monitor system provides three
intervals and issues alerts for a variety of items. methods for programming maintenance intervals:
In particular, the Maintenance Monitor system: r Setting custom maintenance intervals using
r Allows the user to set maintenance intervals. the Maintenance Monitor entry form.

r Monitors maintenance thresholds. r Setting maintenance intervals to MACK


defaults using the Load Defaults selection
r Broadcasts maintenance alerts to the driver. in the Maintenance Monitor entry form.

If installed, GuardDog™, an active monitoring r Setting oil change intervals using driving
feature of V-MAC, tracks real-time occurrences habits. Predictive Oil Change can only be
that require maintenance. GuardDog™ set in Service Diagnostics.
determines when maintenance for a selected
item is needed, using various sensor inputs and MONITORING MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS
algorithms. The driver is notified of maintenance
through the electronic dash or the V.I.P.™. The V-MAC III system monitors the status of each
GuardDog™ and the Maintenance Monitor of the maintenance items. Once the maintenance
system can work separately or together. threshold is reached, an alert is issued.

BROADCASTING MAINTENANCE ALERTS


As soon as a maintenance alert is issued, it is
GuardDog™ is available for CH, CV and CX broadcast to the driver (unless Alert Blackout
model chassis. The vehicle must be equipped mode is currently enabled). To program Alert
with a version 3.0 V.I.P.™ (1MS351 or higher Blackout mode parameters, refer to page 107.
software) and a VECU with 1MS349 for E-Tech™
engines or 1MS364 for ASET™ AI engines to
support the sensors GuardDog™ uses to monitor
the vehicle systems.
If Alert Blackout mode is enabled at the time that
the alert is issued, the alert will be held until the
Alert Blackout Stop Time, GMT threshold is
reached. Once this threshold is reached, the alert
GuardDog™ is not available for MR and LE will be broadcast to the driver.
models or vehicles with an ASET™ AC engine.
After the initial broadcast, the maintenance alert
will be broadcast every time the vehicle is started
(until maintenance is performed and the alert is
reset).

In addition, reminders can also be programmed


for scheduled times throughout the day.

Page 64
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS
Function Description Location/Password Instructions
Edit Owner Allows the user to enter Location Type in the desired information and click on the Save/Exit button.
Storage information such as major →Edit Owner Storage
component part numbers and
dates of repair. Password
Vehicle Data (VECU)
Maintenance Allows the user to set Location 1. Type in the distance, engine hour or date interval for each item.
Monitor maintenance intervals →Maintenance Monitor
2. If a maintenance alarm is desired, enter the appropriate percent for each
Schedule according to distance, engine
8_341.bk Page 65 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Password interval.
hour or date.
Fleet Data (VECU) Example: If the distance interval is set at 10,000 miles and the distance
A maintenance alarm can also alarm interval is set at 80%, the alarm will be issued at 8,000 miles (8,000
be set for each interval. This is 80% of 10,000). An alarm of 85% is set when Predictive Oil Change is
alarm is based on a percentage enabled. Customers can change this.
of the interval. 3. Click on the Save/Exit button.
NOTE: To set maintenance intervals to MACK defaults, click on the Load
Defaults button and select the appropriate option.
NOTE: If Predictive Oil Change (for Step 8 and higher VECU s/w, see the
“STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) is
enabled, all oil change items are disabled. Also, all Oil Change & Filter items,
except for Distance Alarm, are disabled.
Unit Pump Calibrates the Electronic Unit Location 1. Select the unit pump cylinder location.
Calibration Pumps (EUPs). →Program Unit Pump Calibration
2. Type in the four-digit calibration code.
Password 3. Click on the Save/Exit button.
None
NOTE: Don’t mix Standard and CCRS pumps. Both use four-digit pump
numbers.
Set Time and Sets the VECU time and date. Location There are two ways to set the VECU time and date:
Date →Set Time and Date
r Type in the desired time and date and click on the OK button.
Password
Fleet Data (VECU) r Click on the OK button (without changing anything) to set the VECU time
and date to the current PC time and date.
Print Current Allows the user to print the Location Once this option is selected, the View/Print Report selection screen will appear.
Parameters current parameter settings. →View/Print Current Parameters
1. Select the appropriate report (vehicle & data settings, PTO parameters,
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Password etc.) by clicking on the circle next to the desired report.


None 2. Click on the Print button.
View Current Allows the user to view the Location Once this option is selected, the View/Print Report selection screen will appear.
Parameters current parameter settings. →View/Print Current Parameters
1. Select the appropriate report (vehicle and data settings, PTO parameters,
Password etc.) by clicking on the circle next to the desired report.
None 2. Click on the View button.

Page 65
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS (CONTINUED)
Function Description Location/Password Instructions

Page 66
Utilities Sets the PC configuration. Location 1. Select the Com Port setting (please refer to “Selecting Datalink Adapter”
→Utilities on page 40).
→Preferences 2. Select International Unit type.
Password 3. Select Language type.
None
4. Click on the Apply/OK button.

VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS


8_341.bk Page 66 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics


Unit ID Programs the unit identification Range Location The unit ID number is set by the owner of the
Number number. Max.16 characters →Vehicle Component Parameters vehicle and is different from the Vehicle
(General Options) Identification Number (VIN); it is used mainly in a
Default separate fleet management software package sold
ID not entered Password by Mack called InfoMax™ Fleet Management
Vehicle Data (VECU) Software. The Unit IDs are used to track the vehicle
in the InfoMax™ database.
Transmission Sets the highest gear ratio of Range Location This parameter is used by the Lower Gear Road
Top Gear the transmission (fastest truck 0.00 to 2.55 →Vehicle Component Parameters Speed Limit parameter to determine if the vehicle is
Ratio speed gear). (General Options) in top gear.
Default
Factory Set based on Password If the transmission is changed from one type to
transmission installed Vehicle Data (VECU) another, the top gear ratio may be different. If the
top gear ratio changes, the Transmission Top Gear
Ratio setting must be changed.
Carrier Ratio Sets the gear ratio of the rear Range Location NOTE: If the rear axle carrier(s) is replaced, and the
axle carrier(s), which is used 2.0 to 18.0 →Vehicle Component Parameters new ratio is different from the ratio that is currently
by V-MAC to calculate (General Options) stored in V-MAC, the Carrier Ratio setting must be
accurate road speed Default changed to match the new ratio.
information. Factory Set Password
Vehicle Data (VECU)
Tire Size Sets the tire size, which is Range Location Tire size affects accurate road speed calculation
used by V-MAC to calculate 300 to 600 revs/mile →Vehicle Component Parameters because different sized tires travel a different
accurate road speed (General Options) number of revolutions per mile.
information. Default
Factory Set based on Password If tire sizes are changed, it will be necessary to
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

the tires installed Vehicle Data (VECU) change the Tire Size setting.
Tire revs/mile information can be obtained from the
tire manufacturer.
VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Road Speed Sets the number of teeth on Range Location This parameter is set at 16 pulses per mile because
Pickup Teeth the speedometer drive gear 4 to 100 pulses/rev. →Vehicle Component Parameters this is the only option currently available.
(tone wheel). (General Options)
Default NOTE: For accurate speedometer readings, always
16 pulses/rev. Password make sure that the Road Speed Pickup Teeth
Vehicle Data (VECU) parameter is set to 16 pulses per mile.
Road Speed Sets the maximum vehicle Range Location V-MAC will not allow vehicle speed to exceed the
Limit speed limit. 40 to 100 mph →Vehicle Component Parameters value set for this parameter unless specific
(General Options) circumstances exist (see “Enable Cruise Button
8_341.bk Page 67 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Default Bonus”).
65 mph Password
Vehicle Data (VECU) NOTE: If the Enable Cruise Button Bonus feature is
enabled, it may be possible to exceed the Road
Speed Limit value using the speed control switches.
Lower Gear Sets the fastest road speed Range Location This parameter is similar to the Road Speed Limit
Road Speed that can be attained in any 40 to 85 mph or the →Vehicle Component Parameters parameter; limiting road speed in all gears except
Limit gear below the highest gear of Road Speed Limit (General Options) the highest gear of the transmission.
the transmission.
Default Password The purpose of this feature is to encourage the
65 mph Vehicle Data (VECU) driver to operate the vehicle in high gear where
maximum fuel economy can be attained.
NOTE: If an Eaton® Super 10 Top 2 transmission is
installed, this feature will not be available.
Engine Load Sets the engine load threshold Range Location If the Engine Threshold for No MPH Signal
Threshold for for the inactive road speed 20 to 100% →Vehicle Component Parameters parameter is set too low, this will increase the
No MPH sensor fault. (Threshold Options) likelihood of a road speed sensor fault becoming
Signal Default active. Once a road speed fault is active, engine
40% Password speed control will drop out and the engine will return
Vehicle Data (VECU) to idle when the engine load threshold is reached.
This parameter setting can be helpful for customers
operating turbo-unloaders with various engine load
requirements. For maximum detection, select a
lower number.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 67
VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 68
Failed MPH Limits engine power if V-MAC Range Location This feature can function only when the Detect Loss
Sensor detects a road speed sensor 10 to 100% →Vehicle Component Parameters of Signal from MPH Sensor feature is enabled and
Engine Power failure. (Threshold Options) the Limit Power if No Signal from MPH Sensor or
Limit Default Limit Power if Electrical Fault in MPH Sensor feature
50% Password is enabled.
Vehicle Data (VECU)
Customers who desire no power limit should select
the maximum engine power limit (100%). However,
it is important to note that with the maximum engine
power limit selected, it is possible to defeat the set
Road Speed Limit (if there is an active road speed
8_341.bk Page 68 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

sensor fault).
Battery Low Sets the low battery voltage Range Location If battery voltage drops below the Battery Low
Voltage Fault threshold. 10 to 12 volts →Vehicle Component Parameters Voltage Fault Threshold value (with key switch ON
Threshold (Threshold Options) and the engine not running), a fault indication will
Default alert the driver.
10.5 volts Password
Vehicle Data (VECU)
Alternator Sets the low alternator voltage Range Location If alternator voltage drops below the Alternator Low
Low Voltage threshold. 10 to 12 volts →Vehicle Component Parameters Voltage Fault Threshold value (while the engine is
Fault (Threshold Options) running), a fault indication will alert the driver.
Threshold Default
11.5 volts Password
Vehicle Data (VECU)
Alternator Sets the high alternator Range Location If alternator voltage exceeds the Alternator High
High Voltage voltage threshold. 12 to 17 volts →Vehicle Component Parameters Voltage Fault Threshold value (while the engine is
Fault (Threshold Options) running), a fault indication will alert the driver.
Threshold Default
16 volts Password
Vehicle Data (VECU)
Enable Cruise Allows the user to set the Range Location With this feature enabled, the Road Speed Limit
Button Bonus Cruise Max Road Speed Enabled/Disabled →Vehicle Component Parameters threshold can only be exceeded by using the Accel
parameter to a value greater switch. Therefore, the driver must use the speed
than the Road Speed Limit. Default Password controls to get the “bonus” vehicle speed.
When this feature is disabled, Disabled Vehicle Data (VECU)
the option of setting Cruise NOTE: Once the Cruise Max Road Speed setting is
Max Road Speed parameter changed, it will remain at the set value (even if the
higher than the Road Speed Enable Cruise Button Bonus feature is then
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Limit is not available. disabled). Therefore, if the Cruise Max Road Speed
parameter was set at a greater value than the Road
Speed Limit parameter, and then the Enable Cruise
Button Bonus feature is disabled, the Cruise Max
Road Speed value will remain higher than the Road
Speed Limit value and the driver can exceed the
Road Speed Limit.
VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Detect Loss of Activates the fault code that Range Location An inactive road speed sensor condition exists
Signal from indicates an inactive road Enabled/Disabled →Vehicle Component Parameters when the circuit is electrically complete, but the
MPH Sensor speed sensor. (Sensor Options) sensor is not transmitting information to V-MAC with
Default engine underload. Tampering with or misadjusting
Enabled Password the road speed sensor may generate this condition.
Vehicle Data (VECU)
NOTE: The fault code will remain active after correct
adjustment is performed. Forward movement of the
vehicle is required for the fault to become inactive.
8_341.bk Page 69 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Limit Power if Limits engine power to the Range Location If this option is disabled, engine power will not be
No Signal Failed MPH Sensor Engine Enabled/Disabled →Vehicle Component Parameters limited, although a fault (blink code 4-1, failure
from MPH Power Limit setting if no signal (Sensor Options) mode 8) will still be logged. Tampering or
Sensor is detected from the road Default misaligning the MPH sensor causes this condition. If
speed sensor. Enabled Password this option is enabled, a power limit must be set. The
Vehicle Data (VECU) default is a limit of 50% of engine power.
Limit Power if Limits engine power to the Range Location If this option is disabled, engine power will not be
Electrical Failed MPH Sensor Engine Enabled/Disabled →Vehicle Component Parameters limited, although an electrical fault will still be
Fault from Power Limit setting if a road (Sensor Options) logged.
MPH Sensor speed sensor electrical fault is Default
detected. Enabled Password
Vehicle Data (VECU)
Customer Specifies the maximum engine Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Torque Limit torque level for all gear ratios 500 to 2,200 lb-ft →Vehicle Component Parameters s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
numerically higher (lower (Torque Options) FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
gears) than the ratio set in Default
Customer Torque Limit Gear 2,000 lb-ft Password To set torque limit, enter the Customer Torque Limit
Ratio. Vehicle Data (VECU) Gear Ratio to activate the desired torque restriction.
NOTE: Appointing this torque level lower than the
normal engine peak torque output can restrict
engine performance for specified gear ratios.
Customer Sets transmission gear ratio Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Torque Limit above the engine torque (lower 1 to 65 →Vehicle Component Parameters s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Gear Ratio gear) limit specified by the (Torque Options) FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
user. Default
1 Password NOTE: Entered ratio should be a ratio that is in the
Vehicle Data (VECU) transmission.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

The torque limit values can limit but not override


factory settings.

Page 69
VEHICLE COMPONENT PARAMETERS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 70
Torque Limit Identifies the maximum time Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Ramp-Up needed for the engine to revert 1 to 10 sec →Vehicle Component Parameters s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Time to normal or full power. (Torque Options) FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Default
1 sec Password Engine will ramp to full power when the vehicle
Vehicle Data (VECU) reaches a higher gear than specified for Customer
Torque Limit Gear Ratio.
Disable Disables torque limit with PTO Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Torque Limit ON to the customer defined Enabled/Disabled →Vehicle Component Parameters s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
with PTO values if enabled. (Torque Options) FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Default
8_341.bk Page 70 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Disabled Password
Vehicle Data (VECU)
Enable if Fault Logs a fault (blink code 4-1, Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Incorrect failure mode 11 [failure mode Enabled/Disabled →Vehicle Component Parameters s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Gear Ratio not identifiable]) and restricts (Torque Options) FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
power or engine speed if Default
V-MAC detects vehicle is in an Disabled Password This feature must be enabled to work. When
incorrect gear ratio. Vehicle Data (VECU) enabled, this feature will log a road speed sensor
fault (blink code 4-1, failure mode 11) if V-MAC
detects an invalid transmission-gear ratio and will
then limit engine power. (This fault will not become
inactive until the VECU sees a valid gear ratio
underload.) About 15% of full power is still available
to assist in downshifts when in limited power mode.
NOTE: This feature is recommended for highway
applications only.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — GENERAL FEATURES
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Lower Gear Limits vehicle speed to the Range Location NOTE: Do NOT enable the Lower Gear Road
Road Speed Lower Gear Road Speed Limit Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Speed Limit Option if the vehicle has a MACK
Limit Option setting when the transmission →General Features transmission with eight speeds or less. This would
is in lower gears. Default allow the possibility of the gear steps dropping the
Disabled Password engine out of operating range.
Customer Data (VECU)
This option is not available for vehicles with Eaton
Super 10 Top 2 transmissions.
Delay Engine Allows V-MAC to delay engine Range Location In situations such as descending a hill, it may be
8_341.bk Page 71 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Brake brake application while in Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU possible for the vehicle to overrun the Cruise Max
Application in Cruise mode. →General Features Road Speed setting. With the Delay Engine Brake
Cruise Default Application in Cruise option enabled, the engine
Enabled Password brake will turn on at 2 mph above the Cruise Max
Customer Data (VECU) Set Point setting and turn off at 0.5 mph above the
Cruise Max Road Speed setting.
Low Idle Enables the ability to change Range Location This feature cannot be enabled for vehicles with
Speed Adjust the engine low idle speed by Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Allison Automatic Transmissions.
with Switches using the speed control →General Features
switches on the dashboard. Default
Enabled Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Hold Keeps the accessory relay Range Location The Hold Electrical Power ON Until Vehicle Stopped
Electrical energized (when the key is Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU feature is useful if a driver is suspected of turning
Power ON turned off) until the vehicle →General Features the key off when going downhill to prevent
Until Vehicle comes to a stop. Default DataMax™ from logging an overspeed.
Stopped Disabled Password
Customer Data (VECU) Beginning with Step 6 (VECU s/w 1MS320), this
option is not available for vehicles with Eaton®
Super 10 Top 2 transmissions.
Engine Sleep Displays an alert on the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Mode Alert V.I.P.™ which states that the Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Engine Sleep Mode feature →General Features FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only and only for
has been enabled. Default vehicles equipped with a V.I.P.™
Enabled Password
Customer Data (VECU) NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be
set to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
If Engine Sleep Mode is enabled, the engine will not
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

start with no indication that a security measure is


enabled. To display an alert which states that
Engine Sleep Mode is enabled, the user must
enable the Engine Sleep Mode Alert feature.

Page 71
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — GENERAL FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 72
Fuel Sets the type fuel economy Range Location Total MPG — All fuel consumed; shows the effects
Economy displayed on the dash for Total MPG/Driving MPG →Customer Data/VECU of idle operation on overall fuel economy.
Type vehicles equipped with a →General Features
Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ Default Driving MPG — Fuel consumed when moving;
Total MPG Password shows only fuel mileage while driving.
Customer Data (VECU)
Cruise Switch Allows the driver to activate Range Location This feature is available for Step 6 and higher VECU
Disables the Top 2 feature (automatic Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Super 10 shift after 9th gear) using the →General Features FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only and will only
Top 2 Cruise ON/OFF switch. Default appear if an Eaton® Super 10 Top 2 transmission is
Disabled Password installed (does not apply to Lightning™
8_341.bk Page 72 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Customer Data (VECU) Transmissions).


When enabled, the Top 2 feature can be regulated
with the cruise control on/off switch. If the switch is
ON, Top 2 Mode is activated and the transmission
will shift automatically when the transmission is
placed in 9th gear. If the switch is turned off, Top 2
Mode is inactive and the transmission will have to
be shifted manually.
NOTE: Cruise control does not have to be active for
this feature to function.
Engine Sets the threshold for the Range Location NOTE: Exceeding the overspeed setting will log a
Overspeed Engine Overspeed fault 1500 to 2500 rpm →Customer Data/VECU fault (PID 190, failure mode 0, speed high) in
Fault condition. →General Features V-MAC but will not turn on the electronic malfunction
Threshold Default light on the dashboard.
2350 rpm Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Service Brake Allows the user to set a higher Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Fault threshold for the service brake 5 to 10 mph/sec →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Threshold fault when the engine brake is →General Features FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
with Engine engaged. Default
Brake 5 mph/sec Password A service brake fault can sometimes be logged
Customer Data (VECU) when the engine brake is engaged (for example, if
the vehicle is slowed faster than the threshold). For
those situations, the Service Brake Fault Threshold
with Engine Brake feature allows the user to set a
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

higher threshold for the service brake fault.


CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN OPTIONS
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Coolant Controls whether V-MAC will Range Location When this option is disabled, V-MAC is strictly a
Temperature use data from the coolant Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU warning system.
temperature sensor to →Shutdown Options (Sensor
determine if the engine should Default Options)
be shut down. If this option is Enabled
enabled, a warning will occur Password
at 223°F and shutdown will Customer Data (VECU)
occur at 227°F.
8_341.bk Page 73 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Oil Pressure Controls whether V-MAC will Range Location When this parameter is disabled, V-MAC is strictly a
use data from the oil pressure Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU warning system.
sensor to determine if the →Shutdown Options (Sensor
engine should be shut down Default Options)
based on oil psi versus RPM. Enabled
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Coolant Level Controls whether V-MAC will Range Location When this option is disabled, V-MAC is strictly a
use data from the coolant level Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU warning system.
sensor to determine if the →Shutdown Options (Sensor
engine should be shut down. Default Options)
Enabled
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Automatic Controls whether V-MAC will Range Location This option will only appear if an automatic
Transmission use data from the automatic Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU transmission is detected.
Temperature transmission temperature →Shutdown Options (Sensor
Warning and sensor to determine if the Default Options) NOTE: When this parameter is disabled, V-MAC
Shutdown engine should be shut down. If Disabled does not provide a warning for high transmission
this option is enabled, a Password temperature.
warning will occur at 247°F Customer Data (VECU)
For some older chassis with Allison HD automatic
and shutdown will occur at transmissions, the transmission oil temperature
255°F. sensor is connected to the coolant level sensor
(instead of a direct and individual connection).
Therefore, what appears to be a coolant level fault
may actually be a transmission oil temperature fault.
If equipped, there is also a transmission oil
temperature warning light which may help to
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

determine if the fault is related to coolant level or


transmission oil temperature.
NOTE: If the transmission oil temperature sensor is
connected to the coolant level sensor, the Coolant
Level option must be enabled to protect the
transmission.

Page 73
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN OPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 74
Transmission Controls whether V-MAC will Range Location This option will only appear if a transmission oil
Temperature use data from the transmission Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU temperature sensor is detected (CX only and
temperature sensor to →Shutdown Options (Sensor vehicles with electronic dash).
determine if the engine should Default Options)
be shut down. If this option is Disabled When this parameter is disabled, V-MAC is strictly a
enabled, a warning will occur Password warning system.
at 310°F, and shutdown will Customer Data (VECU)
occur at 328°F.
Exhaust Controls whether V-MAC will Range Location This option will only appear if a pyrometer is
Temperature use data from the exhaust Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU detected (CX only and vehicles with electronic
8_341.bk Page 74 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

temperature sensor to →Shutdown Options (Sensor dash).


determine if the engine should Default Options)
be shut down. If this option is Disabled When this option is disabled, V-MAC is strictly a
enabled, a warning will occur Password warning system.
at 1100°F and shutdown will Customer Data (VECU)
NOTE: An exhaust temperature shutdown may
occur at 1150°F. damage valves and seats, although it will usually
prevent the more serious damage that would result
from a temperature increase past the shutdown
threshold.
Idle Cooldown Allows a cooldown period (the Range Location This feature is available for Step 6 and higher VECU
Feature engine will idle for up to Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Enabled 3.5 minutes after the key is →Shutdown Options FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
turned off) if the V-MAC Default
system determines that the Disabled Password NOTE: To shut down immediately, cycle the key
turbocharger is at or above Customer Data (VECU) twice or press the Shutdown Override switch after
450°F. turning the key off.

NOTE: Parking brake must be If this feature is enabled, engine shutdown will be
on for this feature to work. postponed for up to 3.5 minutes if the turbocharger
is hot. If disabled, engine shutdown will occur when
the key is turned off.
NOTE: All switched accessories will turn off once
the engine has shut down.
NOTE: If a pyrometer is installed on a CX model
chassis, V-MAC will use the pyrometer reading to
determine the temperature of the turbocharger.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Shutdown will occur as soon as the temperature


drops below 450°F or the cooldown period has
elapsed (whichever comes first).
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN OPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Idle Shutdown Enables or disables Idle Range Location
Shutdown. ON/OFF →Customer Data/VECU
→Shutdown Options
Default
OFF Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Idle Shutdown Controls whether idle Range Location V-MAC requires electrical input from the PTO circuit
if PTO Active shutdown features will function Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU for this function to operate.
if PTO is engaged. →Shutdown Options (Idle
8_341.bk Page 75 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Default Shutdown Options)


Disabled
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Idle Shutdown Controls whether idle Range Location V-MAC requires electrical input from the PTO circuit
if Single shutdown features will function Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU for SSC to function or the hand throttle to be running
Speed if Single Speed Control (SSC) →Shutdown Options (Idle a SSC function.
Control Active is engaged. Default Shutdown Options)
Disabled
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Idle Shutdown Controls whether engine Range Location This feature is used to prevent idle shutdown in
if % Load power output will affect idle Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU turbo-unloader applications, where engine power
Used Higher shutdown. →Shutdown Options (Idle may be high during pumping operations but no PTO
Than Default Shutdown Options) input is used.
Threshold If disabled, idle shutdown will Disabled
not occur above this threshold. Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Idle Shutdown Controls whether idle Range Location If enabled, idle shutdown will operate even when the
if Hand shutdown features will function Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Hand Throttle is applied.
Throttle if hand throttle speed control is →Shutdown Options (Idle
Control Active engaged. Default Shutdown Options) If disabled, idle shutdown will not operate if the
Disabled Hand Throttle is applied.
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 75
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN OPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 76
Idle Shutdown Controls whether idle Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
if in Sleeper shutdown features will function Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU) s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Mode if Sleeper Mode is enabled. →Shutdown Options (Idle FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Default Shutdown Options)
If enabled, idle shutdown Disabled NOTE: Sleeper Mode is enabled whenever the
features will function and Password driver presses the override switch, service brake or
Sleeper Mode will be Customer Data (VECU) accelerator pedal when the idle shutdown warning
cancelled. lamp/alarm is on.
If disabled, when the driver
enables Sleeper Mode, idle
shutdown will be cancelled
8_341.bk Page 76 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

until the vehicle is moved.


NOTE: Engine will not
shutdown if Sleeper Mode with
PTO 4 Fast Idle Active is
engaged without Sleeper
Mode also engaged.
Idle Shutdown Controls whether idle Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
if in Sleeper shutdown features will function Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Mode with if Sleeper Mode is enabled and →Shutdown Options (Idle FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
PTO 4 Fast the engine is operating at a Default Shutdown Options)
Idle fast idle in response to PTO 4 Disabled NOTE: Engine will not shutdown if Sleeper Mode
switch input. Password with PTO 4 Fast Idle Active is engaged without
Customer Data (VECU) Sleeper Mode also engaged.
If enabled, idle shutdown
features will function and NOTE: If this option is disabled and the following
Sleeper Mode will be conditions exist (vehicle is parked, PTO 4 is
cancelled. engaged, speed control is active and the driver
enables Sleeper Mode), idle shutdown will be
canceled until the vehicle is moved.
NOTE: Sleeper Mode is enabled whenever the
driver presses the override switch, service brake or
accelerator pedal when the idle shutdown warning
lamp/alarm is on.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN OPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Ambient Air Controls when Sleeper Mode Range Location Starting with Step 7 (VECU s/w 1MS328), an
Temperature is allowed based on the Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU additional customer programmable feature was
Option outside air temperature. →Shutdown Options (Idle added to enhance the Idle Shutdown function.
Default Shutdown Options) When enabled, the customer must enter a minimum
Disabled (Step 6)/ and maximum temperature.
Enabled (Step 7 and Password
above) Customer Data (VECU) If Sleeper Mode is enabled and ambient air
temperature is above the maximum (air conditioning
needed) or below the minimum (heat needed),
Sleeper Mode continues to operate and the engine
8_341.bk Page 77 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

stays on.
If ambient air temperature falls between the set
temperature while Sleeper Mode is active, Sleeper
Mode cancels and the system reverts back to
normal Idle Shutdown mode. The engine will
shutdown after the Idle Shutdown Time has ended.
When disabled, Idle Shutdown uses standard
parameters to determine Idle Shutdown.
NOTE: To use this feature, an ambient air
temperature sensor must be installed and enabled
and Idle Shutdown with Sleeper Mode disabled.
NOTE: During the warning period, the electronic
malfunction lamp will flash quietly instead of the
normal shutdown lamp and alarm turning on and
waking the driver.
(Selection of ambient air temperature sensor is
located in OEM Data on the main frame via the F3
Update Option screen of V-MAC.)
Minimum Sets the minimum outside air Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Ambient Air temperature below which −5 to 80°F →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Temperature Sleeper Mode continues to →Shutdown Options (Idle FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
operate. Default Shutdown Options)
60°F For more information on this feature, see Ambient
Password Air Temperature Option.
Customer Data (VECU)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Maximum Sets the maximum outside air Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Ambient Air temperature above which 0 to 125°F →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Temperature Sleeper Mode continues to →Shutdown Options (Idle FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
operate. Default Shutdown Options)
80°F For more information on this feature, see Ambient
Password Air Temperature Option.
Customer Data (VECU)

Page 77
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN OPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Idle Shutdown Controls the length of time that Range Location Example: If the Idle Shutdown Timer feature is set at
Timer the engine can idle before 1 to 999 minutes →Customer Data/VECU 5 minutes and the Idle Shutdown Warm-Up Timer
shutdown occurs. →Shutdown Options (Idle parameter is set at 10 minutes, the vehicle will run
Default Shutdown Options) for 15 minutes (after the Idle Shutdown Warm-Up
If the engine begins idling with 10 minutes Temperature is reached) before shutdown.
the coolant temperature lower Password
than the Idle Shutdown Warm- Customer Data (VECU) However, if the engine begins idling with the coolant
Up Temperature threshold, the temperature at or above the warm-up temperature,
time limit set by the Idle only the time limit set by the Idle Shutdown Timer
Shutdown Timer feature will be feature will apply.
8_341.bk Page 78 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

added to the time limit set by


the Idle Shutdown Warm-Up NOTE: Once an engine shutdown occurs with the
Timer feature. engine at or above the warm-up temperature, the
Idle Shutdown Warm-Up Timer setting will be
ignored when the engine is restarted. In the
example above, the vehicle will only run for
5 minutes (the Idle Shutdown Timer setting) before
shutting down again.
Idle Shutdown Controls the amount of warm- Range Location See Idle Shutdown Timer limitations.
Warm-Up up time allowed after the 0 to 199 minutes →Customer Data/VECU
Timer engine has reached the Idle →Shutdown Options (Idle
Shutdown Warm-Up Default Shutdown Options)
Temperature threshold. 5 minutes
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Idle Shutdown Controls the temperature at Range Location
Warm-Up which the Idle Shutdown 0° to 255°F →Customer Data/VECU
Temperature Warm-Up Timer begins its →Shutdown Options (Idle
count. Default Shutdown Options)
80°F
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Idle Shutdown Sets the length of time Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Warning Time between the idle shutdown 5 seconds to Idle →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
warning and actual shutdown. Shutdown time. →Shutdown Options (Idle FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Shutdown Options)
Default NOTE: This time period has generally been
30 seconds Password 30 seconds.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Customer Data (VECU)


When Sleeper Mode is enabled, the Idle Shutdown
Warning Time should be set higher because more
time may be necessary.

Page 78
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — SHUTDOWN OPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Idle Shutdown Sets the threshold for the If Range Location This parameter refers to the percent of engine
% Load Power Used Higher Than 0 to 100% →Customer Data/VECU power.
Threshold Threshold option. →Shutdown Options (Idle
Default Shutdown Options) NOTE: Monitor in Service Diagnostics.
20%
Password
Customer Data (VECU)

CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — VOCATIONAL FEATURES


8_341.bk Page 79 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics


Set/Resume Defines how the speed control Range Location The Set/Resume Switch State feature is primarily
Switch State Set and Resume switches can Set/Decel–Res/Accel or →Customer Data/VECU for vocational applications for which body builders
function. Set/Accel–Res/Decel →Vocational Features have special interface requirements for the speed
control system.
Default Password
Set/Decel–Res/Accel Customer Data (VECU)
Inhibit Cruise Programs V-MAC to Range Location If this option is disabled, cruise control will continue
Control with disengage cruise control (and Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU to run with a PTO engaged.
PTO ON not allow cruise control to be →Vocational Features (General
re-engaged) when a PTO is Default Options) Regardless of whether this option is enabled or
turned on. Disabled disabled, engine speed is limited to the PTO Engine
Password Speed Limit threshold for that PTO.
Customer Data (VECU)
Single Press Allows the driver to resume Range Location
of Resume to cruise control (after it has Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU
Accelerate dropped out) by pressing and →Vocational Features (General
holding the Resume switch; Default Options)
vehicle speed will resume (and Disabled
continue to increase) until the Password
switch is released. Customer Data (VECU)

Initial Set Allows the driver to use the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
using Resume switch to set speed Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Resume control. →Vocational Features (General FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Switch Default Options)
Disabled NOTE: This feature is only available if speed control
Password has not already been set. Once speed control has
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Customer Data (VECU) been set, the Resume switch will act as the Accel
switch.
Driveshaft Programs V-MAC to treat Range Location NOTE: PTO 2 and the parking brake must be
PTO 2 Option PTO 2 as a Driveshaft PTO. Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU engaged for operation as a Driveshaft PTO.
→Vocational Features
Default
Disabled Password
Customer Data (VECU)

Page 79
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — VOCATIONAL FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 80
Set/Resume Programs V-MAC to log a fault Range Location The speed control switch must be in the ON position
Fault if the Set (blink code 7-3) or Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU for this feature to function.
Diagnostic Resume (blink code 7-4) →Vocational Features
switch is shorted to voltage Default NOTE: It may be necessary to disable this feature
(with the speed control switch Enabled Password for certain custom speed control applications.
on) or held for 60 seconds. Customer Data (VECU)

Switch Reassigns certain switches Range Location Switch reassignments are required only if the
Assignments from their original use to other Two auxiliary switches, →Customer Data/VECU function of a switch is changed for use as an
inputs for speed control. fan clutch override →Vocational Features engagement, dropout, temporary dropout or PTO in
switch and engine brake the speed control system.
Password
8_341.bk Page 80 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

low switch can be


reassigned as PTO 3, Customer Data (VECU) Only one physical switch (engine brake low, spare,
PTO 4, Control 1 or aux. 1 and fan clutch override) can be used for each
Control 2 reassigned (logical) switch, and the physical switch
can be used only once.
Default
No switches reassigned. For Step 8 and higher VECU s/w (see the “STEP/
SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III”
table on page 32) only, if the Brake Pad sensor is
installed, the Spare and Aux. 1 switches are not
available.
NOTE: Some factory installed features may make
use of the two auxiliary switches and are not
available for reassignment in this case.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CAB FAN CONTROLS
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Allow Fan Allows the driver to engage the Range Location Fan overrides can be set so that it is possible to
Override fan while the vehicle is moving Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU engage the fan clutch when parked or moving. Fan
When Moving for the amount of override time →Cab Fan Controls (Fan overrides can also be completely disabled.
set by the Fan Override Time Default Overrides)
When Moving parameter. Disabled Only applicable for vehicles equipped with on/off
Password fans and fan override switches.
Customer Data (VECU)
Fan Override Programs the override time, for Range Location Fan overrides can be set so that it is possible to
Time When the Allow Fan Override When 0 to 1800 seconds →Customer Data/VECU engage the fan clutch when parked or moving. Fan
8_341.bk Page 81 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Moving Moving feature. →Cab Fan Control Options (Fan overrides can also be completely disabled.
Default Overrides)
60 seconds Only applicable for vehicles equipped with on/off
Password fans and fan override switches.
Customer Data (VECU)
Allow Fan Allows the driver to engage the Range Location Fan overrides can be set to engage the fan clutch
Override fan to prevent fan cycling from Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU when parked or moving. Fan overrides can also be
When Parked occurring while the vehicle is →Cab Fan Control Options (Fan completely disabled.
parked (i.e., the driver is Default Overrides)
sleeping). Disabled NOTE: The Allow Fan Override When Parked
Password feature will automatically disengage above
Customer Data (VECU) 2100 rpm.
NOTE: The driver cannot overspeed the fan using
the override switch. If the operator engages the
override switch and engine speed exceeds any
programmed threshold, the override will be
cancelled.
Requires an optional dash-mounted override switch.
Only applicable for vehicles equipped with on/off
fans and fan override switches.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 81
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CAB FAN CONTROLS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 82
Engage Fan Engages the fan when the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and above
with Engine engine brake is engaged Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU systems (VECU s/w 1MS316A, 1MS320, 1MS328,
Brake (provided the engine brake →Cab Fan Control Options 1MS336, 1MS336A, 1MS349, or 1MS364) only.
switch is in the HIGH or Default
number 2 position). Disabled Password With this feature enabled, the fan will engage
Customer Data (VECU) approximately 5 seconds after the engine brake
engages and will disengage 10 seconds after the
engine brake disengages.
NOTE: If rated engine speed is exceeded, the fan
will disengage.
8_341.bk Page 82 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

NOTE: This feature increases usable braking


power, not maximum braking power.
Only applicable for vehicles equipped with on/off
fans and fan override switches.
Engage Fan Engages the fan when the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
with PTO ON specified PTO is engaged. Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
→Cab Fan Control Options FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Default
Disabled Password NOTE: The fan will disengage if engine speed
Customer Data (VECU) exceeds any of the programmed thresholds.
NOTE: If rated engine speed is exceeded, the fan
will disengage.
Only applicable for vehicles equipped with ON/OFF
fans and fan override switches.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CRUISE CONTROL FEATURES
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Cruise Allows the user to choose the Range Location If Standard Cruise Control mode is selected, only
Control Mode cruise control mode. Standard, Custom or →Customer Data/VECU standard cruise settings will apply. Any custom
Disabled →Cruise Control cruise settings will be erased. To avoid losing any
custom cruise settings, save before exiting screen.
Default Password
Standard Customer Data (VECU) If Disabled Cruise Control mode is selected, all
parameters will be disabled and any custom cruise
settings will be erased.
Disable Disables cruise control. Range Location Whenever Disable Cruise Control is selected from
8_341.bk Page 83 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Cruise Standard, Custom or →Customer Data/VECU Cruise Control Mode, cruise will not operate. This
Control Disabled →Cruise Control (Custom Cruise option is intended for vocational and in-city
Control) applications. Applies to all software levels.
Default
Standard Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Autoresume Programs cruise control to Range Location If this option is disabled, cruise control will drop out
with Clutch automatically resume after a Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU after a shift and it will be necessary to press the
shift (once the clutch has been →Cruise Control (Custom Cruise Resume switch after releasing the clutch pedal to
re-engaged). Default Control) re-engage cruise control.
Disabled
Password The Cruise Control Mode option must be selected to
Customer Data (VECU) Custom and be enabled for this feature to function.
Accel Bump Allows the user to program a Range Location The Cruise Control Mode option must be selected to
Speed set speed increase to coincide 0–2 mph/bump →Customer Data/VECU Custom and enabled for this feature to function.
with one quick “bump” of the →Cruise Control (Custom Cruise
Accel switch. Default Control)
1 mph/bump
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Decel Bump Allows the user to program a Range Location The Cruise Control Mode option must be selected to
Speed set speed decrease to coincide 0–2 mph/bump →Customer Data/VECU Custom and enabled for this feature to function.
with one quick “bump” of the →Cruise Control (Custom Cruise
Decel switch. Default Control)
1 mph/bump
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 83
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CRUISE CONTROL FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 84
Hold to Ensures that before any Range Location The Cruise Control Mode option must be selected to
Nearest change in road speed can 0, 0.25, 0.5 or 1.0 mph →Customer Data/VECU Custom and enabled for this feature to function.
occur (using the Set, Accel or →Cruise Control (Custom Cruise
Decel switch), V-MAC will find Default Control) Example: Assume that the current road speed is
the nearest increment of the 0.5 mph 63.4 mph, the Accel Bump Speed parameter is set
Hold to Nearest setting and Password to 2 mph and the Hold to Nearest parameter is set to
apply the change in road Customer Data (VECU) 1.0 mph. If the driver bumps the Accel switch,
speed to that value. If V-MAC will determine that 63 mph is the nearest
disabled, any change in road increment of 1.0 to 63.4 mph and add the 2 mph
speed (using the Set, Accel or bump to 63 mph. The resulting speed (after one
Decel switch) will apply to the bump) will be 65.0 mph.
8_341.bk Page 84 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

current speed. In the above example, if the Hold to Nearest


parameter is set to 0 (meaning it is disabled), the
resulting speed (after one bump) will be 65.4 mph.
Cruise Min Controls the minimum vehicle Range Location If vehicle speed drops below this speed, cruise
Road Speed speed to engage and remain in 15 to 35 mph →Customer Data/VECU control will drop out and cannot be set.
cruise. →Cruise Control (Standard
Default Cruise Settings)
20 mph
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Cruise Max Controls the maximum vehicle Range Location The Cruise Max Road Speed limit should be set 2 to
Road Speed speed that can be obtained in 40 mph to the Road →Customer Data/VECU 3 mph below the Road Speed Limit threshold to
cruise control. Speed Limit value (or 40 →Cruise Control (Standard allow the driver some extra speed for passing when
to 100 mph if the Cruise Cruise Settings) needed.
Button Bonus option is
enabled) Password This value may be higher than the Road Speed
Customer Data (VECU) Limit if cruise button bonus is enabled.
Default
75 mph
Bump Speed Allows the user to program a Range Location This standard cruise option is only available if the
set speed increase or 0, 0.5, 1, 2 mph/bump →Customer Data/VECU Custom Cruise Control mode is disabled.
decrease to coincide with one →Cruise Control (Standard
quick “bump” of the Accel or Default Cruise Settings)
Decel switch. 1 mph/bump
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CRUISE CONTROL FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Engagement Designates one or more Range Location The Cruise Control Mode option must be selected
and Dropout switches as a requirement for Required ON, Required →Customer Data/VECU and enabled for these features to function.
Requirements cruise control operation. The OFF, Ignore →Cruise Control (Custom Cruise
state of each switch (ON or Control) NOTE: If PTO 1, PTO 2, PTO 3 or PTO 4 is selected
OFF) can be programmed as Default as an engagement requirement, the Inhibit Cruise
an engagement, dropout or Ignore Password with PTO ON option must be disabled.
temporary dropout Customer Data (VECU)
NOTE: If a switch is programmed as an
requirement for cruise control. engagement requirement when it is in the ON
position, turning the switch off once cruise is
8_341.bk Page 85 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

engaged will not disable cruise unless that switch


was programmed as a dropout requirement when it
is in the OFF position.

CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE (EHT) FEATURES


Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Enable Allows the user to program Range Location NOTE: PTO switches cannot be used for hand
Custom EHT custom Electronic Hand Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU throttle initialization. PTO switches cause hand
Control Throttle (EHT) control options. →Elect. Hand Throttle Control throttle dropout.
Default
Disabled Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Autoset Programs V-MAC to Range Location The hand throttle Autoset feature is similar to the
automatically jump to the hand Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Jump to Min Speed feature; it can be used as a fast
throttle Min Set Speed (without →Elect. Hand Throttle Control idle setting, or for numerous remote control
pressing the Set switch) when Default (Custom Options) applications.
hand throttle speed control is Disabled
enabled. Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Jump to Min Programs V-MAC to jump to Range Location If this feature is disabled, the hand throttle speed
Speed the hand throttle Min Set Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU cannot be set unless the engine speed is above the
Speed setting when the Set →Elect. Hand Throttle Control Min Set Speed setting.
switch is pressed. Default (Custom Options)
Disabled NOTE: If the Min Set Speed parameter is set lower
Password than the Low Idle Speed setting (programmed in
Customer Data (VECU) SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS), speed control will be set
but the engine speed will not drop below the Low
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Idle Speed setting.


Single Speed Enables the hand throttle Range Location EHT single speed control can be overridden with the
Control (SSC) single speed control mode; Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU accelerator pedal (up to the EHT Engine Speed
engine speed will →Elect. Hand Throttle Control Limit setting).
automatically go to the Default (Custom Options)
Electronic Hand Throttle SSC Disabled
RPM setting if Autoset is Password
enabled. Customer Data (VECU)

Page 85
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE (EHT) FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 86
Hold to Ensures that the minimum Range Location This option is automatically enabled if hand throttle
Minimum engine speed (set in the hand Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Autoset, Jump to Min Speed or Single Speed
Speed throttle Min Set Speed feature) →Elect. Hand Throttle Control Control feature is enabled.
is maintained whenever hand Default (Custom Options)
throttle speed control is active. Disabled If engine speed is dragged below the hand throttle
Password Min Set Speed value, more fuel will be injected to
Customer Data (VECU) get back up to the minimum speed setting.
Dropout Disengages hand throttle Range Location This feature cannot be enabled if the hand throttle
Above speed control if engine speed Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Autoset feature is enabled.
Maximum exceeds the hand throttle Max →Elect. Hand Throttle Control
Speed Set Speed setting. Default (Custom Options)
8_341.bk Page 86 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Disabled
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Electronic Sets the engine speed for EHT Range Location The Electronic Hand Throttle SSC RPM setting
Hand Throttle operation in Single Speed 475 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU should be greater than the hand throttle Min Set
SSC RPM Control mode. →Elect. Hand Throttle Control Speed and less than both the hand throttle Max Set
Default (Custom Options) Speed and Engine Speed Limit settings.
625 rpm
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Accel Bump Allows the user to program a Range Location
Speed set engine speed increase to 0 to 2000 rpm/bump →Customer Data/VECU
coincide with one quick “bump” →Elect. Hand Throttle Control
of the Accel switch. Default (Custom Options)
0 rpm/bump
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Decel Bump Allows the user to program a Range Location
Speed set engine speed decrease to 0 to 2000 rpm/bump →Customer Data/VECU
coincide with one quick “bump” →Elect. Hand Throttle Control
of the Decel switch. Default (Custom Options)
0 rpm/bump
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE (EHT) FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Hold to Ensures that before any Range Location Example: Assume that the current engine speed is
Nearest change in engine speed can 0 or nearest 5 to nearest →Customer Data/VECU 1364 rpm, the Accel Bump Speed parameter is set
occur (using the Accel or 2000 rpm →Elect. Hand Throttle Control to 50 rpm and the Hold to Nearest parameter is set
Decel switch), V-MAC will find (Custom Options) to Nearest 25 rpm. If the driver bumps the Accel
the nearest increment of the Default switch, V-MAC will determine that 1375 is the
Hold to Nearest setting and 0 Password nearest increment of 25 to 1364 rpm and add the
apply the change in engine Customer Data (VECU) 50 rpm bump to 1375 rpm. The resulting speed
speed to that value. (after one bump) will be 1425 rpm.
In the above example, if the Hold to Nearest
8_341.bk Page 87 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

parameter is set to Nearest 10, the resulting speed


(after one bump) will be 1410 rpm because the
nearest value to 1364 would be 1360.
Accel Ramp Sets the rate at which engine Range Location Not applicable unless custom EHT settings are
Rate speed increases when the 50 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/VECU enabled.
Accel switch is pressed. →Elect. Hand Throttle Control
Default (Custom Options)
100 rpm/sec
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Decel Ramp Sets the rate at which engine Range Location Not applicable unless custom EHT settings are
Rate speed decreases when the 50 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/VECU enabled.
Decel switch is pressed. →Elect. Hand Throttle Control
Default (Custom Options)
100 rpm/sec
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Min Set Controls the minimum engine Range Location NOTE: If the Low Idle Speed Adjust with Switches
Speed speed allowed for Electronic 475 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU feature is enabled, the hand throttle Min Set Speed
Hand Throttle (EHT) operation; →Elect. Hand Throttle Control value must be set to 475 rpm (because the Low Idle
hand throttle speed control will Default (General Options) Speed Adjustment with Switches feature drops the
not operate below this engine 475 rpm engine speed to 500 rpm before using the speed
speed. Password control switches to set the new low idle speed). If
Customer Data (VECU) the hand throttle Min Set Speed value is greater
Engine speed must be at or than 500 rpm, it may not be possible to set low idle
above this setting before EHT with the speed control switches.
will operate.
NOTE: For normal operation, if the engine speed
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

drops below this value, speed control will drop out.


Max Set Sets the maximum engine Range Location NOTE: Engine speed cannot exceed this limit using
Speed speed that can be achieved 750 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU the Accel switch; however, engine speed can be
using the speed control →Elect. Hand Throttle Control increased up to the hand throttle Engine Speed
switches. Default (General Options) Limit threshold using the accelerator pedal.
2100 rpm
Password
Customer Data (VECU)

Page 87
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE (EHT) FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Engine Speed Controls the maximum engine Range Location This speed cannot be exceeded with the accelerator
Limit speed allowed with the 750 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU pedal or the switches.
Electronic Hand Throttle (EHT) →Elect. Hand Throttle Control
engaged. Default (General Options)
2100 rpm
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Max Road Sets the maximum vehicle Range Location NOTE: Hand throttle speed control will not operate
Speed speed threshold for hand 0 to 20 mph or cruise →Customer Data/VECU above this vehicle speed; however, cruise control
8_341.bk Page 88 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

throttle speed control. Min Road Speed →Elect. Hand Throttle Control will operate if vehicle speed is at or above the cruise
(General Options) control Min Road Speed setting.
Default
10 mph Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Ramp Rate Programs the rate at which the Range Location Not applicable if Custom EHT settings are enabled.
engine speed increases and 50 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/VECU
decreases when the Accel and →Elect. Hand Throttle Control This rate is also used when the hand throttle Single
Decel switches are used. Default (General Options) Speed Control (SSC) feature is engaged or
100 rpm/sec resumed.
Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Engagement Designates one or more of the Range Location NOTE: Control 1 and Control 2 must be defined in
and Dropout assigned switches Required ON, Required →Customer Data/VECU the Switch Assignments field in order to be used as
Requirements (programmed in Switch OFF, Ignore, Pedal →Elect. Hand Throttle Control requirements.
Assignments) as requirements Pushed, Pedal NOT (General Options)
for electronic hand throttle Pushed NOTE: At least one dropout condition must be
speed control operation. The Password specified.
state of each switch (ON or Default Customer Data (VECU)
Ignore NOTE: If a switch is programmed as an
OFF) can be programmed as engagement requirement when it is in the ON
an engagement, dropout or position, turning the switch off once EHT control is
temporary dropout engaged will not disable EHT control unless that
requirement for hand throttle switch was programmed as a dropout requirement
control. when it is in the OFF position.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 88
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — PTO SPEED CONTROL SETTINGS
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Single Speed Programs V-MAC to apply the Range Location
Control (SSC) PTO Preset Speed setting Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU
when PTO speed control is →PTO Speed Control Settings
enabled; the engine will ramp Default
up to the Preset Speed setting Disabled Password
and the accelerator pedal will Customer Data (VECU)
work up to limit.
8_341.bk Page 89 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Park Brake Specifies whether the parking Range Location If this parameter is enabled, the parking brake must
Check to brake must be applied for Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU be applied for the Preset Speed setting to be used.
Enable PTO single speed control settings to →PTO Speed Control Settings If disabled, the Preset Speed setting will be in effect
be in effect when the PTO is Default without the parking brake being applied.
engaged. Disabled Password
Customer Data (VECU) Essentially, this parameter is a short-cut for setting
the parking brake as an engagement requirement
for PTO operation.
NOTE: Park Brake engagement requirements for
PTO 2 cannot be changed if Driveshaft PTO is
selected.
Min Set Sets the minimum engine Range Location For normal operations, if engine speed drops below
Speed speed allowed for PTO 475 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU this value, speed control will drop out.
operation; PTOs will not →PTO Speed Control Settings
operate below this engine Default
speed. 475 rpm Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Engine speed must be at or
above this setting before
speed control for the PTO will
operate.
Max Set Sets the maximum engine Range Location Although this limit cannot be exceeded using the
Speed speed that can be achieved 750 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU Accel switch, engine speed can be increased up to
using the speed control →PTO Speed Control Settings the Engine Speed Limit threshold using the
switches. Default accelerator pedal.
2100 rpm Password
Customer Data (VECU) This parameter must not be set at a value less than
the mode’s Minimum Set Speed setting.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Max Road Sets the vehicle speed Range Location


Speed threshold for PTO dropout; 0 to 20 mph or Cruise →Customer Data/VECU
Dropout Speed Control will not operate Min mph unless →PTO Speed Control Settings
above this vehicle speed. Driveshaft PTO is
enabled. Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Default
10 mph

Page 89
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — PTO SPEED CONTROL SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 90
Engine Speed Sets the maximum engine Range Location NOTE: Because this is the absolute engine speed
Limit speed allowed with PTO speed 750 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU limit when a PTO is engaged, use caution when
control engaged; this speed →PTO Speed Control Settings setting a value greater than the PTO Max Set Speed
cannot be exceeded with the Default parameter.
accelerator pedal or the 1800 rpm Password
switches. Customer Data (VECU)

Preset Speed Sets the engine speed to be Range Location For this function to operate, the PTO Single Speed
used when PTO single speed 475 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/VECU Control (SSC) option must be enabled.
control is engaged. →PTO Speed Control Settings
Default
1000 rpm Password
8_341.bk Page 90 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Customer Data (VECU)


Ramp Rate Programs the rate at which Range Location This rate is also used when PTO single speed
engine speed increases and 50 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/VECU control is engaged and resumed.
decreases when the Accel and →PTO Speed Control Settings
Decel switches are used. Default
100 rpm/sec Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Road Speed Sets the maximum fueled Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Limit vehicle speed allowed when 0 to 100 mph →Customer Data/VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
PTO (1, 2, 3 or 4) is engaged. →PTO Speed Control Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Default
100 mph Password For each PTO, a road speed limit can be applied. If
Customer Data (VECU) V-MAC receives a PTO engaged signal, the vehicle
road speed limit will be limited to this value.
NOTE: This parameter doesn't override the normal
vehicle Road Speed Limit setting.
NOTE: Speed Control will still drop-out at the PTO
Maximum Road Speed Setting.
The PTO road speed limit will be restricted under
accelerator pedal, speed control, and Cruise control
operations. However, if the engine is forced to ride
on the low idle governor, the low idle governor will
take priority. This way, the vehicle is restricted to the
PTO road speed limit (provided that the
transmission is in a reasonable gear for road
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

speed).
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CUSTOM PTO SETTINGS
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Autoset Programs V-MAC to jump Range Location The PTO Autoset feature is similar to the Jump to
automatically to the PTO Min Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU Min Speed feature; it can be used as a fast idle
Set Speed (without pressing →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4) setting, or for numerous remote control applications.
the Set switch) when PTO Default
speed control is enabled with Disabled Password
variable speed control. When Customer Data (VECU)
enabled with Single Speed
Control, V-MAC automatically
8_341.bk Page 91 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

goes to the Preset Speed.


Jump to Programs V-MAC to jump to Range Location If this feature is disabled, PTO speed control cannot
Minimum the PTO Min Set Speed when Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU be set unless engine speed is above the PTO Min
Speed the Set switch is pressed. →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4) Set Speed.
Default
Disabled Password NOTE: If the PTO Min Set Speed parameter is set
Customer Data (VECU) lower than the Low Idle Speed parameter, PTO
speed control will be set but engine speed will not
drop below the Low Idle Speed setting (programmed
in SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS).
Hold to Programs V-MAC to not allow Range Location If engine speed is dragged below this setting, more
Minimum engine speed to drop below Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU fuel will be injected to get engine speed back up to
Speed the PTO Min Set Speed. →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4) the PTO minimum set.
Default
Disabled Password This option is automatically enabled if PTO Autoset,
Customer Data (VECU) or Single Speed Control (SSC) features are
enabled.
Dropout Programs V-MAC to Range Location This feature cannot be enabled if the PTO Autoset
Above disengage PTO speed control Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/VECU feature is enabled.
Maximum if engine speed exceeds the →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4)
Speed PTO Max Set Speed. Default
Disabled Password
Customer Data (VECU)
Accel Bump Allows the user to program a Range Location
Speed set engine speed increase to 0 to 2000 rpm/bump →Customer Data/VECU
coincide with one quick “bump” →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4)
of the Accel switch. Default
0 rpm/bump Password
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

The Bump Speed must be an Customer Data (VECU)


even multiple of the Hold to
Nearest setting (unless none is
specified).

Page 91
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CUSTOM PTO SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 92
Decel Bump Allows the user to program a Range Location
Speed set engine speed decrease to 0 to 2000 rpm/bump →Customer Data/VECU
coincide with one quick “bump” →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4)
of the Decel switch. Default
0 rpm/bump Password
The Bump Speed must be an Customer Data (VECU)
even multiple of the Hold to
Nearest setting (unless none is
specified).
Hold to Ensures that before any Range Location Example: Assume that the current engine speed is
Nearest change in engine speed can 5 to 2000 rpm →Customer Data/VECU 1336 rpm, the Accel Bump Speed parameter is set
8_341.bk Page 92 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

occur (using the Accel or →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4) to 100 rpm and the Hold to Nearest parameter is set
Decel switch), V-MAC will find Default to Nearest 50 rpm. If the driver bumps the Accel
the nearest increment of the 0 rpm Password switch, V-MAC will determine that 1350 is the
PTO Hold to Nearest setting Customer Data (VECU) nearest increment of 50 to 1336 rpm and add the
and apply the change in 100-rpm bump to 1350 rpm. The resulting speed
engine speed to that value. (after one bump) will be 1450 rpm.
In the above example, if the Hold to Nearest
parameter is set to Nearest 25, the resulting speed
(after one bump) will be 1425 rpm because the
nearest value to 1336 would be 1325 rpm.
Accel Ramp Programs the rate at which Range Location
Rate engine speed increases when 50 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/VECU
the Accel switch is pressed. →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4)
While in Single Speed Control, Default
engine speed ramps up to the 100 rpm/sec Password
Preset Speed at this rate. Customer Data (VECU)

Decel Ramp Programs the rate at which Range Location


Rate engine speed decreases when 50 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/VECU
the Decel switch is pressed. →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4)
Default
100 rpm/sec Password
Customer Data (VECU)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
CUSTOMER DATA/VECU — CUSTOM PTO SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Engagement Designates one or more Range Location NOTE: PTO 3, PTO 4, Control 1 and Control 2 must
and Dropout switches as requirements for Required ON, Required →Customer Data/VECU be defined in the Switch Assignments field in order
Requirements PTO operation. The state of OFF, Ignore, Pedal →PTO Custom Settings (1-2/3-4) to be used as engagement or dropout requirements.
each switch (ON or OFF) can Pushed or Pedal NOT
be programmed as an Pushed Password NOTE: At least one dropout condition must be
engagement, dropout or Customer Data (VECU) specified.
temporary dropout Default
Ignore NOTE: If a switch is programmed as an
requirement for PTO speed engagement requirement when it is in the ON
control. position, turning the switch off will not disable speed
8_341.bk Page 93 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

control unless the switch was also programmed as a


dropout requirement when it is in the OFF position.
MINIMUM RULE: The Minimum Rule states that the
system will choose the minimum value from the
PTOs that are engaged
1. The lowest active Min Set Speed is the
minimum*.
2. The lowest active Max Set Speed is the
maximum*.
3. The lowest active Max Vehicle Speed is used
for drop out.
4. The lowest active Engine Speed Limit is used
(true even when speed control is not active).
5. The lowest active Preset Single Speed is
used.
6. The lowest active Ramp Rate is used.
7. Single speed takes precedence over variable
speed.
8. For Step 4 (VECU s/w 1MS312/312A)
software, non-Autoset takes precedence over
Autoset.
9. For Step 7 and higher VECU s/w (see the
“STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR
V-MAC III” table on page 32), the lowest
active Road Speed Limit is used. *
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

* This becomes true once the Set/Decel or Resume/


Accel inputs are toggled or held to 12 volts. To
lower a speed without using these inputs, set an
Engine Speed Limit.

Page 93
CUSTOMER DATA/EECU FEATURES

Page 94
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
High Idle Sets the maximum no load Range Location The High Idle Engine Speed parameter basically
Engine Speed engine speed. 1850 to 2100 rpm →Customer Data/EECU controls how quickly the power cuts off when
2050 to 2100 rpm* revving the engine, typically during an upshift.
Password
Default Customer Data (EECU) *For ASET™ AC engine
2100 rpm
Coolant Sets the coolant temperature Range Location Setting a lower temperature will cause the fan to
Temperature threshold for engaging the ON/ 190°F to 210°F →Customer Data/EECU engage earlier. Likewise, setting a higher
Fan OFF fan only (not available for temperature will cause the fan to engage later.
Default Password
8_341.bk Page 94 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Engagement electronic viscous fan).


Threshold 200°F Customer Data (EECU)

Air Temp. Fan Sets the air temperature Range Location An ON/OFF fan type is required for this feature to
Engagement threshold for engaging the ON/ 130°F to 175°F →Customer Data/EECU operate.
Threshold OFF fan only (not available for
electronic viscous fan). Default Password Setting a lower temperature will cause the fan to
175°F Customer Data (EECU) engage earlier. Likewise, setting a higher
temperature will cause the fan to engage later.
Air Sets the amount of time that Range Location Requires an ON/OFF-type engine fan.
Conditioning the ON/OFF fan remains ON 0 to 300 seconds →Customer Data/EECU
Override Time when the Air Conditioning (5 minutes) If this parameter is programmed to 0, the air
(A/C) system stops requesting Password conditioning fan will engage and disengage with A/C
fan operation with the vehicle Default Customer Data (EECU) pressure while the vehicle is parked.
parked, and the A/C system no 60 seconds
When parameter is set and the vehicle is moving,
longer requires fan operation the engine fan will operate normally. The engine fan
(not available for electronic will engage as needed by the A/C system and
viscous fan). disengage when no longer needed by the climate
control system.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
CUSTOMER DATA/EECU FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Engine Sleep Enables Engine Sleep Mode Range Location As with theft deterrence, Engine Sleep Mode is
Mode so that the engine will not start, Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU intended to slow a thief down to the point at which it
even if a valid theft deterrence is undesirable to steal the vehicle.
access code is entered. This Default Password
feature must be disabled to Disabled Customer Data (EECU) This feature is aimed at customers who have limited
start the vehicle. yard security or who have vehicles parked on lots
for extended periods of time.
If Engine Sleep Mode is enabled, the engine will not
start with no indication that a security measure is
8_341.bk Page 95 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

enabled. To display an alert which states that


Engine Sleep Mode is enabled, the vehicle must
have a Vehicle Information Profiler (V.I.P.™) and the
user must enable the Engine Sleep Mode Alert
feature.
NOTE: Because the engine will not start when the
Engine Sleep Mode feature is activated, it cannot be
enabled at the factory or at the distributor. The
customer, as needed, can only enable it.
Smart Fan Activates diagnostics for the Range Location If this feature is disabled, the fan drive will not be
Type Installed ON/OFF fan or electronic None/On-Off/Electronic →Customer Data/EECU controlled by V-MAC and cannot be overridden
viscous fan. Viscous using the override switch on the dash.
Password
Default Customer Data (EECU) NOTE: Do NOT enable the Smart Fan Installed
Factory Set feature if a fan clutch is not installed.
NOTE: The Electronic Viscous option is only
available for Step 2 and higher EECU s/w for
ASET™ AC engine (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page
32).
Driveshaft Employs special measures (in Range Location If the Driveshaft PTO Dropout feature is disabled, a
PTO Dropout addition to the standard Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU load dump will not be detected by V-MAC, and
Enabled Driveshaft PTO controller) to engine overspeed will only be limited by the
limit engine overspeed when a Default Password standard controller.
sudden load dump (release of Disabled Customer Data (EECU)
engine load) is detected. NOTE: The Driveshaft PTO Dropout feature can
interfere with Driveshaft PTO operation and should
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

only be enabled if there is excessive overspeeding


during a load dump.

Page 95
CUSTOMER DATA/EECU FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 96
Driveshaft Sets the engine acceleration Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher EECU
PTO Dropout threshold for the Driveshaft 1000 to 2000 rpm/sec →Customer Data/EECU s/w and Step 2 and higher EECU s/w for ASET™
Threshold PTO Dropout option. AC engine (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Default Password IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page
2000 rpm/sec Customer Data (EECU) 32).
NOTE: The Driveshaft PTO Dropout feature can
interfere with Driveshaft PTO operation and should
only be enabled if there is excessive overspeed
during a load dump.
Fuel Enables the fuel temperature Range Location This feature must be enabled for all ASET™ AI
8_341.bk Page 96 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Temperature sensor diagnostics. Enabled/Disable →Customer Data/EECU engines.


Sensor
Applied Default Password Not available for ASET™ AC EECU s/w 1MS334
Enabled Customer Data (EECU) and higher.
Oil Level Activates diagnostics for a Range Location
Sensor Jaeger oil level sensor. Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU
Available
Default Password
Disabled Customer Data (EECU)
Output Boost Provides a way to transmit Range Location If a boost pressure sensor is installed, enable the
Pressure on boost pressure sensor Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU Output Boost Pressure on J1587 feature.
J1587 information to a service tool.
Default Password Not available for ASET™ AC EECU s/w 1MS334
Disabled Customer Data (EECU) and higher.
Engine Brake Specifies that an engine brake Range Location NOTE: Do not enable this feature unless an engine
Installed is installed so that V-MAC can Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU brake is installed.
control it properly.
Default Password NOTE: Beginning with Step 8 (EECU s/w 1MS327),
Enabled Customer Data (EECU) an engine brake diagnostic will be active whenever
the engine brake is marked as installed. Therefore,
the brake should only be programmed as installed at
initial engine programming if the engine has a brake
system.
NOTE: For ASET™ engines, the engine brake will
not engage until the coolant temperature reaches
125°F.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

MACK Specifies that the MACK Range Location NOTE: Do not enable this feature unless a MACK
PowerLeash™ PowerLeash™ engine brake is Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU PowerLeash™ engine brake is installed.
Engine Brake installed so that V-MAC can
Installed control it properly. Default Password NOTE: This feature is available for ASET™ Step 3
Enabled Customer Data (EECU) EECU s/w 1MS368 and higher.
CUSTOMER DATA/EECU FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Exhaust Specifies that an exhaust Range Location NOTE: Do not enable unless an exhaust brake is
Brake brake is installed so that Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU installed.
Installed V-MAC can control it properly.
Default Password This feature is for exports only.
Disabled Customer Data (EECU)
Oil Activates diagnostics for an oil Range Location
Temperature temperature sensor. Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU
Sensor
Available Default Password
8_341.bk Page 97 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Disabled Customer Data (EECU)


Air Supports those vehicles that Range Location Available for Step 7 and higher EECU s/w and
Conditioning are not equipped with air Enabled/Disabled →Customer Data/EECU Step 2 and higher EECU s/w for ASET™ AC
Installed conditioning but are equipped engines (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Option with an engine on/off fan. Default Password IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page
Factory Set Customer Data (EECU) 32).
When disabled and without air conditioning (A/C)
installed, V-MAC will ignore any signal or lack of
signal (12 or 0 volts) from the A/C freon high
pressure switch (located at EJ1-7 of the ASET™ AI
EECU and EJ1-35 on the ASET™ AC EECU) and
will not lock the air operated fan ON. V-MAC will,
however, continue to control the engine on/off fan
through input received from an optional dash-
mounted on/off engine fan switch and customer-
defined input from the Intake Manifold Air
Temperature and Coolant Temperature sensors.
When enabled and with an A/C system and Air
Operated Engine Fan Installed, V-MAC will use
information from the high freon pressure switch
circuit and the other sensor inputs listed above to
help control the customer programmable Smart
Engine Fan functions.
Fuel Calibrates the DataMax™ fuel Range Location Enter the actual amount of fuel used during the last
Calibration usage reported by V-MAC. −20 to +20% →Customer Data/Engine EECU trip in the Actual Trip Fuel field.
Default Password For detailed instructions for determining the actual
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

0% = no correction Customer Data (EECU) amount of fuel used, refer to Determining Actual
Fuel Consumed.
NOTE: The calibration factor must be between 80
and 120% (the Actual Trip Fuel value entered must
be within 20% of the Calculated Trip Fuel value
displayed). For example, if 100 gallons is displayed
in the Calculated Trip Fuel field, then the Actual Trip
Fuel entered must be between 80 and 120 gallons.

Page 97
FLEET DATA — THEFT DETERRENCE FEATURES

Page 98
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Number of ID Sets how many times the Range Location A Co-Pilot or Vehicle Information Profiler (V.I.P.™)
Attempts driver can attempt to enter an 1 to 20 attempts →Fleet Data dash is required for this function to operate.
incorrect driver ID access code →Fleet Theft Deterrence Settings
before V-MAC shuts down the Default (Driver ID)
engine. 3 attempts
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Demand Enables the Limited Power Range Location A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
Driver ID to security mode. V-MAC will limit Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data feature to function.
8_341.bk Page 98 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Operate engine power until a valid →Fleet Theft Deterrence Settings


access code is entered. Default (Security Mode) The power limit for Limited Power mode is
Disabled programmed in the % Power Limit if No ID Entered
Password option.
Fleet Data (VECU)
NOTE: If the Demand Driver ID to Operate option is
enabled, the Demand ID to Continue Running
Beyond 30 Seconds option will be disabled. These
two security modes cannot be enabled at the same
time.
Limited Sets the power limit for the Range Location The Demand ID to Operate option must be enabled
Power: % Limited Power security mode; 10 to 50% →Fleet Data for this feature to function.
Power Limit if engine power will be limited to →Fleet Theft Deterrence Settings
No ID Entered this setting until a valid access Default (Security Mode) For a summary of security options, refer to “Theft
code is entered. 50% Deterrence System Summary” on page 63.
Password
Fleet Data (VECU) A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
feature to function.
Demand ID to Enables the Limited Time Range Location The power limit for Limited Time mode is
Continue security mode. V-MAC will limit Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data programmed in the % Power Limit Before Shutdown
Running engine power and shut down →Fleet Theft Deterrence Settings option.
Beyond after 30 seconds unless a valid Default (Security Mode)
30 Seconds access code is entered. Disabled NOTE: If the Demand ID to Continue Running
Password Beyond 30 Seconds option is enabled, the Demand
Fleet Data (VECU) ID to Operate option will be disabled. These two
security modes cannot be enabled at the same time.
Limited Time: Sets the power limit for the Range Location The Demand ID to Continue Running Beyond 30
% Power Limit Limited Time security mode; 10 to 50% →Fleet Data Seconds option must be enabled for this feature to
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Before engine power will be limited to →Fleet Theft Deterrence Settings function.
Shutdown this setting until either a valid Default (Security Mode)
access code is entered or 20% For a summary of security options, refer to Theft
30 seconds pass and the Password Deterrence System Summary.
engine shuts down. Fleet Data (VECU)
A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
feature to function.
FLEET DATA — THEFT DETERRENCE FEATURES (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Access T: Sets the distance threshold Range Location A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
Distance used by V-MAC to shut down 0 to 50 miles →Fleet Data feature to function.
Before the vehicle when a Level T →Theft Deterrence Settings
Shutdown (theft) access code has been Default (Access Level T)
entered. 1 mile
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Access T: Sets the distance threshold Range Location A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash is required for this feature
Distance used by V-MAC to turn on the 0 to Distance Before →Fleet Data to function.
8_341.bk Page 99 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Remaining shutdown warning lamp when Shutdown setting. →Theft Deterrence Settings
After a Level T (theft) access code (Access Level T) The warning lamp will remain ON for this specified
Shutdown has been entered. Default distance, after which the engine will shut down.
Lamp ON 0.5 miles Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Access T: Sets the time threshold used Range Location A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
Time Before by V-MAC to shut down the 0 to 99 min →Fleet Data feature to function.
Shutdown vehicle when a Level T (theft) →Theft Deterrence Settings
access code has been Default (Access Level T)
entered. 5 min
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Access P: % Sets the engine power limit Range Location A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
Mechanic when a Level P (power limited) 0 to 100% →Fleet Data feature to function.
Power Limit access code has been →Theft Deterrence Settings
entered. Default (Access Level P)
50%
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Access S: Sets the engine power limit Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Mechanic when a Level S (speed limited) 10 to 50 mph →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Road Speed access code has been →Theft Deterrence Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Limit entered. Default (Access Level S)
12 mph A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
Password feature to function.
Fleet Data (VECU)
NOTE: V-MAC will not allow the Low Idle Speed
setting (programmed in SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS)
to be overridden.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 99
FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 100
Vehicle Specifies what type of dash Range Location Vehicle Information Profiler (V.I.P.™) is available for
Display Type display, if any, is installed. None, Co-Pilot, V.I.P.™ →Fleet Data Step 5 and higher VECU s/w (see the “STEP/
→Fleet Display and Trip Settings SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III”
Default (Display Options) table on page 32).
None
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Advance to Allows the driver to advance to Range Location A Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ dash display is required for this
Next Trip via the next trip by pressing a Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data feature to function.
Display button on the Co-Pilot/V.I.P.™ →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
Default (Display Options) The Vehicle Display Type feature must be set to
8_341.bk Page 100 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Enabled Co-Pilot or V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.


Password
Fleet Data (VECU) Specifying a new trip will close the current trip and
advance DataMax™ to the next trip. DataMax™ can
store up to 12 trips for Steps 5–7 VECU s/w and up
to 10 trips for Step 8 and higher VECU s/w (see the
“STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC
III” table on page 32) only.
Reset Allows the driver to clear trip Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
DataMax™ information (stored in the Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w only and also requires a V.I.P.™ dash display.
via V.I.P.™ vehicle data log) by pressing a →Fleet Display and Trip Settings DataMax™ can store up to 12 trips for Steps 5–7
button on the V.I.P.™ Default (Display Options) VECU s/w and up to 10 trips for Step 8 and higher
Disabled VECU s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
Password IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32)
Fleet Data (VECU) only.
The Vehicle Display Type feature must be set to
V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
Driver Reset Allows the driver to reset Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Maintenance maintenance issues by Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Items via pressing a button on the →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only and also
V.I.P.™ V.I.P.™ Default (Display Options) requires a V.I.P.™ dash display.
Disabled
Password The Vehicle Display Type feature must be set to
Fleet Data (VECU) V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
This feature is automatically available when the
Owner-Operator Program Group is selected (Step 8
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

VECU s/w and higher).


FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Reset Allows the driver to reset driver Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Driver Trip trip information (stored in Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
via V.I.P.™ DataMax™) by pressing a →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only and also
button on the V.I.P.™ Default (Display Options) requires a V.I.P.™ dash display. DataMax™ stores
Enabled up to 2 Driver Display trips.
Two Driver Display trips exist Password
that can be viewed on the Fleet Data (VECU) NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be
V.I.P.™ This option permits the set to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
driver to reset his/her
displayed trip(s) by pressing a
8_341.bk Page 101 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

button on the V.I.P.™


Display Trip Allows the driver to display one Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Information current trip information on the Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
on V.I.P.™ V.I.P.™ →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only and requires
Default (Display Options) V.I.P.™ dash display.
Enabled
Password NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be
Fleet Data (VECU) set to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
Disable Sweet Prohibits “Sweet Spot” Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Spot information display on the Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
V.I.P.™ when disabled. →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
When enabled, V-MAC will Default (Display Options)
transfer “Sweet Spot” indicator Enabled When enabled, the V.I.P.™ indicator status will
lamp real time across J1587 Password illuminate when the engine is operating at top
for use by the V.I.P.™ and/or Fleet Data (VECU) efficiency (the “Sweet Spot”) for the amount of
dash LCD. power required.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 101
FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 102
Programming Allows the user to select Range Location This feature is available for Step 7 and higher VECU
Options via V.I.P.™ programming options NONE, Fleet →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
V.I.P.™ via a packaged group. Programming Group or →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only and requires
Owner-Operator (Parameters Programmed in a V.I.P.™ dash display.
Programming Group V.I.P™ Options)
The Fleet Programming Group package contains
Default Password the following features:
NONE Fleet Data (VECU)
r Autoresume with Clutch (allows the driver to
reprogram Cruise Control Autoresume via the
V.I.P.™)
8_341.bk Page 102 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

r Engine Brake Delay in Cruise (allows the


Engine Brake Delay in Cruise to be enabled/
disabled via the V.I.P.™)
r Governor Type (permits the governor type to
be selected via the V.I.P.™)
r Idle Cooldown (allows Idle Cooldown to be
enabled via the V.I.P.™)
r Low Idle Speed Setting (For Step 8 and higher
VECU s/w [see the “STEP/SOFTWARE
IDENTIFICATION FOR V-MAC III” table on
page 32] only. Allows the user to change the
engine low idle speed via the V.I.P.™)
(List continued on next page.)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
The Owner-Operator Programming Group package
contains the above Fleet Programming Group
features and includes the following additional
features:
r Clear Electronic Faults (allows the user to
clear faults via the V.I.P.™)
r Cruise Control Maximum Speed (permits the
user to reprogram the Cruise Control
8_341.bk Page 103 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Maximum via the V.I.P.™)


r Fuel Calibration (allows the user to reset the
EECU Fuel Calibration correction via the
V.I.P.™)
r Fuel Economy Target (permits the user to
program the Fuel Economy Target via the
V.I.P.™)
r Fuel Economy Type (allows the user to
choose the Fuel Economy Type via the
V.I.P.™)
r Idle Shutdown (permits the Idle Shutdown to
be enabled/disabled via the V.I.P.™)
r Maintenance Reset via V.I.P.™ (allows the
driver to reset maintenance issues via the
V.I.P.™)
r Road Speed Limit (permits the driver to
reprogram the vehicle road speed limit via the
V.I.P.™)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 103
FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 104
Reset Allows the driver to reset Range Location This feature is available for E-Tech™ engines with
Predictive Oil Predictive Oil Change using Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data 1MS349 VECU s/w and for ASET™ AI engines with
Change via the override switch. →Fleet Display and Trip Settings 1MS364 VECU s/w and 1MS371 data file only and
Override Default (Display Options) requires GuardDog™ installation or an oil change
Switch Disabled lamp.
Password
Fleet Data (VECU) As a standalone feature, Predictive Oil Change is
available for CL, CV, DM, DMM, RD and RB models
with Step 8, 1MS336 or higher VECU s/w.
NOTE: Predictive Oil Change is suited for chassis
only that meet the following requirements:
8_341.bk Page 104 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

r The engine is equipped with a 28-quart oil pan


r A Mack filtration system is used with dual full
flow elements and a Centri-Max® spinner filter
r The engine uses approved EO-M+ oil
r Oil consumption is 3000 miles per quart or
better
r The engine does not have a problem with oil
dilution
To operate this feature, enable Predictive Oil in
OEM Data on the main frame via the F3 Update
Option screen of V-MAC and in this location of CDP.
NOTE: Predictive Oil Change is not available for MR
and LE models or vehicles equipped with an
ASET™ AC engine.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
GuardDog™ Enables the GuardDog™ Range Location This feature is available for E-Tech™ engines with
Enabled maintenance function. Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data VECU s/w 1MS349 and for ASET™ AI engines with
→Fleet Display and Trip Settings VECU s/w 1MS364 and data file 1MS371 only and
Default (Display Options) also requires that the vehicle have a version 3.0
Enabled when enabled V.I.P.™ display with 1MS351 software.
in OEM Data Password
Fleet Data (VECU) The following are the available GuardDog™ VECU-
supported sensors:
r Brake Pad Wear (optional for CH, CV and CX
8_341.bk Page 105 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

series only)
r Coolant Level Low
r Fuel Level
r Predictive Oil Drain
r Wiper Fluid Level (for CH, CV and CX series
only)
The following are the available GuardDog™ EECU-
supported sensors:
r Air Restriction (for CH, CV and CX series
only)
r Oil Level (for CH, CV and CX series only)
r To operate this feature, enable
GuardDog™ in OEM Data on the main
frame via the F3 Update Option screen
of V-MAC and in this location of CDP.
GuardDog™ Sets the threshold percentage Range Location This feature is available for E-Tech™ engines with
Low Fuel for the GuardDog™ Low Fuel 1 to 50% →Fleet Data VECU s/w 1MS349 and for ASET™ AI engines with
Level Warning Warning →Fleet Display and Trip Settings VECU s/w 1MS364 and data file 1MS371 only and
Threshold % Default (Display Options) also requires that the GuardDog™ function be
13% enabled.
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Fleet Fuel Sets the fleet reference fuel Range Location
Economy economy value. 0 to 25 mpg →Fleet Data
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Target →Fleet Display and Trip Settings


Default
5.0 mpg Password
Fleet Data (VECU)

Page 105
FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 106
Data Save Determines how DataMax™ Range Location Wrap Around — DataMax™ will wrap back to trip 1
Mode logs additional trip information Wrap Around, Stop After →Fleet Data and overwrite the information.
(beyond 10 trips). Last Trip, Leave Last →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
Trip Open Stop After Last Trip — DataMax™ will discontinue
Password logging information until trip information is reset.
Default Fleet Data (VECU)
Wrap Around Leave Last Trip Open — DataMax™ will leave the
last trip open (i.e., the driver will not be able to
advance to the next trip) until trip information is
reset.
Idle Data Type Sets the type of idle data that Range Location Total Idle — Logged when the engine is running and
on V.I.P.™ will be displayed on the Total Idle, True Idle, no vehicle speed.
8_341.bk Page 106 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

→Fleet Data
V.I.P.™ Qualified Idle →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
True Idle — Logged when PTO 1 and PTO 2 are
Default Password OFF, speed control is disabled, the engine is
Total Idle Fleet Data (VECU) running, accelerator pedal position is less than 2%
and no vehicle speed.
Qualified Idle — Logged when the engine has idled
for longer than the Idle Logging Delay threshold.
This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only and also
requires V.I.P.™ dash display.
NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be
set to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
Request Programs V-MAC to request a Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Driver Name driver name every time the Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
at Every engine is started. →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only and also
Startup? Default requires a V.I.P.™ dash display.
Disabled Password
Fleet Data (VECU) NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be
set to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
Source of Describes the source of the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Driver Name driver trip names for Do not attach a name, →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
for Trip DataMax™ tracking purposes. Use theft deterrence ID, →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only and also
Use list of names, Use a requires a V.I.P.™ dash display.
Password
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

driver entered code


Fleet Data (VECU) NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be
Default set to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
Use theft deterrence ID
FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Length of Sets the length of all driver Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Driver Trip entered trip codes. 1 to 10 characters →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Code →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only and also
Default requires V.I.P.™ dash display.
None Password
Fleet Data (VECU) NOTE: The Vehicle Display Type feature must be
set to V.I.P.™ for this feature to function.
Maintenance Determines when Range Location NOTE: Broadcast times are set to Greenwich Mean
Broadcast maintenance alert reminders Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data Time (GMT). By setting to GMT, absolute time is
8_341.bk Page 107 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Schedule will be broadcast; after the →Fleet Display and Trip Settings always fixed. To program broadcast times, calculate
initial alert has been Default the current time zone offset from GMT and
broadcast, the alert will also be Disabled Password determine which time period should be selected.
broadcast every time the Fleet Data (VECU)
vehicle is started. In addition, Example: In the Eastern Standard time zone (EST),
the user can program V-MAC there is an offset of −5 from GMT. Therefore, if the
to broadcast a reminder alert 4 a.m. broadcast time period is enabled (set to
at specified times each day “YES”), the alert will sound at 11 p.m. EST.
(4 a.m., 8 a.m., 12 p.m., etc). If Examples of time zone offsets:
the specified time is enabled,
the maintenance alert will be r Eastern/Standard (−5)
broadcast at that time. r Australia (+10)
Blackout Enables Alert Blackout mode, Range Location Alert Blackout mode is generally used to suppress
Mode which suppresses all Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data maintenance alerts while the driver is sleeping.
Enabled maintenance alerts issued →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
during a set period of time. Default The start and stop times for Alert Blackout mode are
Disabled Password set in the Alert Blackout Mode Start Time, GMT and
Fleet Data (VECU) Alert Blackout Mode Stop Time, GMT parameters.
Alert Blackout Sets the time for the beginning Range Location Alert Blackout mode must be enabled for this
Start Time, of Alert Blackout mode. 0:00 to 23:00 hours →Fleet Data parameter to be set (see Blackout Mode Enabled).
GMT →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
(Greenwich Default (Blackout Options) Any alerts that were issued after the Alert Blackout
Mean Time) 0:00 Start Time, GMT threshold was reached will be
Password disregarded until the Alert Blackout Stop Time, GMT
Fleet Data (VECU) threshold is reached.
Alert Blackout Sets the time for the ending of Range Location Alert Blackout mode must be enabled for this
Stop Time, Alert Blackout mode. 0:00 to 23:00 hours →Fleet Data parameter to be set (see Blackout Mode Enabled).
GMT →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Default (Blackout Options) Any alerts that were issued after the Alert Blackout
0:00 Start Time, GMT threshold was reached will be
Password disregarded until the Alert Blackout Stop Time, GMT
Fleet Data (VECU) threshold is reached.

Page 107
FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 108
Engine Sets the threshold for the Range Location The Engine Overspeed, Company Limit threshold is
Overspeed, Engine Overspeed, Company 1500 to 2500 rpm →Fleet Data often set at rated engine speed, or typically
Company Limit condition (overspeed →Fleet Display and Trip Settings 1800 rpm.
Limit beyond the fleet’s Default (Overspeed Options)
recommended target). 2150 rpm DataMax™ will log the total accumulated
Password overspeeds, and also the maximum value for the
Fleet Data (VECU) current trip.
Engine Sets the threshold for the Range Location DataMax™ will log the number of occurrences and
Overspeed Engine Overspeed (Severe) 1500 to 2500 rpm →Fleet Data the maximum overspeed value for the life of the
Logging condition. →Fleet Display and Trip Settings vehicle.
(Severe) Default (Overspeed Options)
2500 rpm
8_341.bk Page 108 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Engine Sets the threshold for the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Overspeed Fueled Engine Overspeed 1500 to 2150 rpm →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Logging with condition. →Fleet Display and Trip Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Fuel Default (Overspeed Options)
2150 rpm DataMax™ will log the total accumulated time that
Password the vehicle was in overspeed during the trip.
Fleet Data (VECU)
The Engine Overspeed Logging with Fuel
parameter is useful for tracking engine overspeeds
when the engine brake is not on.
Vehicle Sets the threshold for the Range Location DataMax™ logs the total accumulated time that the
Overspeed Fueled Vehicle Overspeed 40 to 100 mph →Fleet Data vehicle was in overspeed during the trip.
Logging with condition (with fuel being →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
Fuel supplied, rather than when Default (Overspeed Options) The Vehicle Overspeed Logging with Fuel threshold
moving downhill). 65 mph is useful if the company provides incentives to drive
Password below the Road Speed Limit setting.
Fleet Data (VECU)
Vehicle Ove Sets the threshold for the Range Location DataMax™ logs the total accumulated time that the
rspeed Vehicle Overspeed, All 40 to 100 mph →Fleet Data vehicle was in overspeed, the number of
Logging, All Conditions state (the fleet’s →Fleet Display and Trip Settings occurrences and the maximum value happening
Conditions recommended limit under any Default (Overspeed Options) during the current trip.
circumstances). 80 mph
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Idle Logging Sets the threshold for a Range Location Refer to the Idle Data Type on V.I.P.™ feature for
Delay qualified idle; if the engine 0 to 1092 minutes →Fleet Data idle type definitions.
idles longer than the specified →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
time period, it will be logged as Default (Overspeed Options)
a qualified idle. 0
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
FLEET DATA — DISPLAY AND TRIP SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Hard Braking Sets the deceleration Range Location
Threshold threshold for hard braking; −12 to −1 mph/sec →Fleet Data
when deceleration exceeds →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
this value, V-MAC will log a Default (Overspeed Options)
hard braking occurrence. −8 mph/sec
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Traction Loss Sets the threshold for traction Range Location
Threshold loss; when acceleration 1 to 12 mph/sec →Fleet Data
8_341.bk Page 109 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

exceeds this value, a traction →Fleet Display and Trip Settings


loss occurrence will be logged. Default
8 mph/sec Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Custom To support special Range Location Refer to the APPENDIX for a complete description
Parameters requirements, a Custom 0 to 65535 →Fleet Data of available Custom Defined Statements.
Defined Statement may be →Fleet Display and Trip Settings
provided as part of the Default (Overspeed Settings)
vehicle’s original build. Some 0
statements contain settings Password
that are programmed in the Fleet Data (VECU)
Custom Parameter 1 and
Custom Parameter 2 fields.

FLEET DATA — DRIVER EVENT SETTINGS


Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Write Report Programs V-MAC to write a Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Once per Day Driver Event summary report Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
at a specified time each day. →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Default (Fleet Driver Event Summary)
Enabled The exact time of day is specified in the Driver Event
Password Summary Time parameter.
Fleet Data (VECU)
Write Report Programs V-MAC to write a Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
When Key Driver Event summary report Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Turned ON each time the key is turned on. →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Default (Fleet Driver Event Summary)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Disabled
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)

Page 109
FLEET DATA — DRIVER EVENT SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 110
Write Report Programs V-MAC to write a Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
at Next Trip/ Driver Event summary report Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trip Reset at the start of a new trip. →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Default (Fleet Driver Event Summary)
Disabled
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Driver Event Sets the time of day when the Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Summary daily report will be generated. 0:00 to 23:00 (GMT) →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Time →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Default
0:00 Password The Write Report Once per Day option must be
8_341.bk Page 110 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Fleet Data (VECU) enabled for this feature to function.


Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Exception PTO 1 is engaged. Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
PTO 1 Default (Driver Event Exception
Enabled Disabled Triggers)
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Exception PTO 2 is engaged. Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
PTO 2 Default (Driver Event Exception
Enabled Disabled Triggers)
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Exception the Fueled Engine Overspeed Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: threshold is exceeded. →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Fueled Default (Driver Event Exception
Engine Speed Disabled Triggers)
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Exception the Engine Overspeed Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: (Severe) threshold is →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Severe exceeded. Default (Driver Event Exception
Engine Speed Enabled Triggers)
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
FLEET DATA — DRIVER EVENT SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Exception the Engine Overspeed, Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: Company Limit threshold is →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Company exceeded. Default (Driver Event Exception
Limit Engine Disabled Triggers)
Speed
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
8_341.bk Page 111 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Exception the Fueled Vehicle Overspeed Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: threshold is exceeded. →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Fueled Default (Driver Event Exception
Vehicle Disabled Triggers)
Overspeed
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Driver Event Triggers a Driver Event when Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Exception the Vehicle Overspeed, All Enabled/Disabled →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger: Conditions threshold is →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Vehicle exceeded. Default (Driver Event Exception
Overspeed All Disabled Triggers)
Conditions
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Driver Event These parameters set which Up to 10 items may be Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Summary List items will be included in the selected. →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Driver Event summary report. →Fleet Driver Event Settings FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32) only.
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)

FLEET DATA — INCIDENT LOG FILTER AND TRIGGER SETTINGS


Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Incident Log These parameters are used to Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Filter and customize the triggers for the →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Trigger incident log. →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32).
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Settings Settings
NOTE: Unless the incident log is being triggered
Password incorrectly, a change to these settings is not
Fleet Data (VECU) recommended.

Page 111
FLEET DATA — INCIDENT LOG FILTER AND TRIGGER SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 112
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Engine Speed 10 to 200 rpm →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Increase →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32).
Trigger Default Settings
Threshold 50 rpm
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Engine Speed −200 to −10 rpm →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Decrease →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32).
Trigger Default Settings
8_341.bk Page 112 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Threshold −50 rpm


Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Vehicle Speed 0.5 to 25 mph →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Increase →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32).
Trigger Default Settings
Threshold 1 mph
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Vehicle Speed −25 to −0.5 mph →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Decrease →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32).
Trigger Default Settings
Threshold −1 mph
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Vehicle 0.5 to 100 mph/sec →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Acceleration →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32).
Trigger Default Settings
10 mph
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Vehicle −100 to −0.5 mph/sec →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Deceleration →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32).
Trigger Default Settings
−10 mph
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
FLEET DATA — INCIDENT LOG FILTER AND TRIGGER SETTINGS (CONTINUED)
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Trigger 100 to 2500 msec →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Sample Time →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32).
Default Settings
100 msec
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Recording 100 to 2500 msec →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
8_341.bk Page 113 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Rate →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32).
Default Settings
500 msec
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Engine Speed 1639 to 65535 msec →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Filter →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32).
Default Settings
6556 msec
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
Incident Log Range Location This feature is available for Step 5 and higher VECU
Vehicle Speed 1639 to 65535 msec →Fleet Data s/w (see the “STEP/SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Filter →Incident Log Filter and Trigger FOR V-MAC III” table on page 32).
Default Settings
6556 msec
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING

Page 113
FLEET DATA — CUSTOMER DEFINED LABELS
Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics

Page 114
Customer Allows the user to define the Location Type in the desired name for each label. These
Defined CUST DEF 1 and CUST DEF →Fleet Data names will appear in the Maintenance Monitor
Labels 2 labels in the Maintenance →Maintenance Customer Defined schedule.
Monitor schedule. Labels
Password
Fleet Data (VECU)

FLEET DATA — DRIVER ID SETTINGS


Feature Description Range/Default Location/Password Limitations, Service Hints, Related Topics
8_341.bk Page 114 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

Driver ID Allows the user to assign driver Location 1. Type in the individual driver ID.
Settings IDs and access restriction →Fleet Data
2. Select the appropriate access level.
levels. →Program Driver ID Settings
3. Click on the Next ID button for next driver.
Password
Fleet Data (VECU) 4. Click on the Clear IDs button to clear ID.
CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
8_341.bk Page 115 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING


Determining Actual Fuel Consumed Vehicle Operation

To use the fuel calibration feature, an accurate Operate the vehicle for a minimum of 500 miles,
determination of fuel consumption must first be or until at least half the available fuel has been
made by performing these steps: consumed. The more fuel consumed, the more
r Initial Fuel Fill accurate the calibration factor will be.

r Vehicle Operation
r Final Fuel Fill
For the best results, several tanks of fuel may be
Initial Fuel Fill consumed. For these intermediate fills, it is only
necessary to use an accurate filling station
1. Allow the vehicle to sit overnight, or for a (preferably the same station that was used for the
minimum of eight hours, so that the fuel in initial fill) and record the amount of fuel added.
the tanks has had time to cool to ambient
temperature.
2. Move the vehicle to the fueling station and Final Fuel Fill
shut off the engine. 1. Allow the vehicle to sit overnight so that the
The vehicle should be parked on a level fuel in the tank(s) has a chance to cool.
surface. If there is any question about the For optimum accuracy, ambient temperature
surface being level, make a chalk mark on for the final fill should be equal to, or 10°
the pavement to indicate the location of the lower than, the ambient temperature when
front axle. This reference point will be used the fuel tank(s) was initially filled.
when the vehicle is brought back for the final
fuel fill. The pump used to dispense the fuel 2. Move the vehicle to the same filling station
should be accurate, and should be the pump that was used for the initial fuel. If
that is normally used to fill the vehicle. applicable, place the front axle over the
chalk marks. Close the fuel tank connecting
3. If the vehicle is equipped with dual fuel line valve if the vehicle is equipped with dual
tanks, close the connecting line valve. fuel tanks.
3. Fill the fuel tank(s) to the exact same level
as the initial fill (level with the bottom
outboard side [low side] of the fuel filler
On dual tank dual-draw systems, it may be neck).
necessary to check the fuel level in both tanks on
initial fill and final fill. 4. Reopen the fuel tank connecting line valve.
5. Record the fuel meter reading. Then add the
4. Dispense fuel into the tank(s) until the level amount of fuel recorded for any intermediate
of fuel just contacts the bottom outboard fills. This figure represents the actual fuel
(low side) of the fuel filler neck. consumed.
Do not overfill. The more accurate and
consistent the initial and final fills are, the
more accurate the data will be. If equipped
with dual fuel tanks, accurately fill both
tanks. Then open the fuel tank connecting
line valve.
5. Reset the trip values in the DataMax™ log.

Page 115
8_341.bk Page 116 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

NOTES

Page 116
8_341.bk Page 117 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

Page 117
8_341.bk Page 118 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


DEALER PROGRAMMING DEALER GENERAL
PROGRAMMING
Introduction INFORMATION
V-MAC Dealer Programming Software, which
supports V-MAC I, V-MAC II and V-MAC III, Electronic Control Unit (ECU)
allows the user to reprogram the data file or
software file for an ECU. In the previous (DOS) The V-MAC I and II system had one ECU, but the
versions of V-MAC support software, Dealer V-MAC III system has both an engine ECU and a
Programming Software was divided into two vehicle ECU. Because V-MAC III requires
separate programs: MACK DATA separate programming for each ECU,
PROGRAMMING (MDP) and PRODUCT programming procedures have been modified to
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING (PSP). With the allow the user to program each ECU individually.
Windows version of Dealer Programming
Software, both MDP and PSP functions are
provided in one program (DEALER
PROGRAMMING). Version 2.6 covers V-MAC I, II When the VECU is reprogrammed, ensure that
and III. you save and restore the Customer Data
information because odometer mileage will be
lost.
ACCESSING DEALER PROGRAMMING
SOFTWARE
There are two ways to access DEALER V-MAC III Configuration
PROGRAMMING.
r If there is a Mack Software folder on the To determine the current system configuration,
desktop, double-click on the folder. Then use the following steps:
double-click V-MAC Dealer Programming 1. Determine the VECU Purchase P/N — Look
Software. at the part number next to ASS’Y w/SW on
r If there is no icon on the desktop, access the the VECU label.
start menu and select Programs and select 2. Determine the EECU Purchase P/N — Look
Mack Programs and V-MAC Dealer at the part number on the EECU label.
Programming Software. Then click V-MAC
Dealer Programming. 3. Determine the VECU Hardware P/N —
Access the MACK database using V-MAC
Online. Then select F11 Vehicle ECU Part
ONLINE HELP FUNCTION Number Change from the Electronically
This version of V-MAC support software features Controlled Vehicles menu. Look at the part
an online help function (similar to Windows Help). number listed in the VECU H/W Part field.
The online help includes all of the information 4. Determine the EECU Hardware P/N —
contained in this user’s guide. Simply press F1 to Access the MACK database using V-MAC
view the help topics. Online. Then select F9 Engine ECU Part
Number Change from the Electronically
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Controlled Vehicles menu. Look at the part
number listed in the ECU1 H/W Part field.
The current V-MAC III Service Manual, 8-211,
provides a complete description of the operation 5. Determine the VECU Software P/N — Look
of the V-MAC III system, as well as instructions at the VECU Software Version field in the
for performing diagnostics and repair of system SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS Vehicle
components. Information display screen.
6. Determine the EECU Software P/N — Look
The phone number for the V-MAC Software at the EECU Software Version field in the
Support Center is (800) 247-0039. Hours are SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS Vehicle
8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. (Eastern time), Monday Information display screen.
through Friday.

Page 118
8_341.bk Page 119 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


V-MAC II Configuration
To determine the current system configuration,
use the following steps: To determine the Vehicle Information Profiler
(V.I.P.™) software version, access the V.I.P.™
1. Determine the ECU Purchase P/N — Look display and follow these steps:
at the “V-MAC II CONFIGURATION” table
on page 120, and refer to the Hardware P/N 1. From the main menu, select General
and Software P/N. Information and click the Enter button.
2. Determine the ECU Hardware P/N — Look 2. Select Vehicle ID and click the Enter button.
at the part number on the ECU label. View the V.I.P.™ part number and software
version.
3. Determine the ECU Software P/N — Look at
the ECU Software Version field in the
SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS Vehicle
Information display screen.

V-MAC III CONFIGURATION TABLE


Vehicle ECU
Step VECU Purchase P/N VECU Hardware P/N VECU Software P/N
4 12MS411M2 12MS48M2 1MS312A
5 12MS411M3 12MS48M3 1MS316A
6 12MS411M4 12MS48M4 1MS320
7 12MS411M5 12MS48M5 1MS328
8 12MS411M6 12MS48M6 1MS336
8A 12MS411M7 12MS48M6 1MS336A
9 12MS411M8 12MS48M6 1MS349
9B* 12MS411M9 12MS48M6 1MS364
Engine ECU
Step EECU Purchase P/N EECU Hardware P/N EECU Software P/N
2Ø 12MS520M 12MS415M 1MS334
3Ø 12MS528M 12MS425M 1MS368
4 12MS510M2 12MS410M2 1MS38P2
5 12MS514M 12MS410M2 1MS317
7 12MS517M 12MS410M2 1MS326
7A 12MS517AM 12MS410M2 1MS326A
12MS517BM
8 12MS518M 12MS413M 1MS327
12MS523M& 12MS413AM&
9* 12MS526M 12MS413AM 1MS363

* For ASET™ AI engines


Ø For ASET™ AC engines
& For integral barometric sensor

Page 119
8_341.bk Page 120 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


V-MAC II CONFIGURATION TABLE
ECU
Step ECU Purchase P/N ECU Hardware P/N ECU Software P/N
4 12MS59M6 12MS54M5 1MS34A
12MS59M7 12MS59M5 1MS34B
12MS59M8 12MS59M6 1MS34B
6 12MS59M9 12MS59M7 1MS36
7 12MS59M10 12MS54M7 1MS39
8 12MS59M11 12MS54M7 1MS315

V-MAC I CONFIGURATION TABLE


V-MAC Module V-MAC Module V-MAC Module V-MAC Module
Component VMP100 VMP101 VMP111 VMP121
VECU Software P/N 12MS51M 12MS51M2 12MS51M3 12MS51M6
12MS51M4 12MS51M7
12MS51M5
Component FIC SW011V23 FIC SW011V25 FIC B0101V10 FIC B0101V10/12
FIC B0101V10 FIC B0101V12
FIC B010V12
FIC Software P/N 12MS45M 12MS45M2 12MS45M3 12MS45M3/M4
12MS45M3 12MS45M4/5
12MS45M4

Page 120
8_341.bk Page 121 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


Dealer Programming File
Nomenclature
Files may vary in size from version to version.
Dealer programming software consists of two The software is designed to adjust to different
programming portions: product software and data sizes and remains operational.
file programming. Both kinds of programming
have different file types. The product software
file-programming portion of Dealer Programming V-MAC III DATA FILE EXTENSIONS
uses two different types of files:
VECU EECU
r A customer data file is created whenever File Type Extension Extension
you save customer parameters. Customer Data File .dtv .dte
r A product software file is downloaded from Reprogramming Data .rfv .rfe
the MACK database via V-MAC Online and File
reprograms (flashes) the ECU software or Verification Data File .vev .vee
V.I.P.™ software. Product Software File .sfv .sfe

The data file-programming portion of Dealer V-MAC I AND II DATA FILE EXTENSIONS
Programming uses three different types of files:
File Type ECU Extension
r A customer data file is created whenever
Customer Data File .dta
you save customer parameters.
Reprogramming Data File .ref
r A reprogramming (reference) data file is
downloaded from the MACK database via Verification Data File .ver
V-MAC Online and reprograms the ECU Product Software File .prd
data. Extension File (V-MAC II .ext
only)
r A verification file is created after
programming is completed. It is then
V.I.P.™ DATA FILE EXTENSIONS
uploaded to the MACK database via V-MAC
Online. File Type V.I.P.™ Extension
Product Software File .vip
THE DATA FILE EXTENSION
Each data file has a name and is recognized by
its file extension, or the last three characters that
are separated by a period. For example, the
familiar Word document file extension is always
identified by “.doc.”

For MACK programming files, the file extension


reflects the type of data file it is and the ECU it is
associated with. For example, the V-MAC III class
8 vehicle programming data file is always
identified by “.rfv,” or reprogramming file, for
vehicle.

Below are data file extension tables for V-MAC


class 8 vehicles. Use these tables to identify files
when saving customer data or downloading,
programming and uploading from and to the
MACK database.

Page 121
8_341.bk Page 122 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


V-MAC Dealer Programming Phases DEALER PROGRAMMING
Both product software programming and data file SOFTWARE COMPUTER
programming involve phases. REQUIREMENTS
Programming with Dealer Programming Software
PRODUCT SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING (PSP) has two requirements:
Reprogramming a product software file involves r V-MAC Online access (via MACKnet)
two distinct phases:
r V-MAC support software for Windows
1. The first phase is downloading. (current version)
Downloading is receiving a product software
file from the MACK database and For other computer requirements, please refer to
transferring the file to your PC using V-MAC “SOFTWARE INSTALLATION SPECIAL TOOLS
Online. AND EQUIPMENT” on page 8.
2. The second phase is programming.
Programming (flashing) is loading a product
software file that was downloaded from the
MACK database into the ECU using V-MAC
Dealer Programming software.

DATA FILE PROGRAMMING (MDP)


Reprogramming a data file is similar to product
software programming, but involves three distinct
phases:
1. The first phase is downloading.
Downloading is receiving a data file from the
MACK database and transferring the file to
your PC using V-MAC Online.
2. The second phase is programming.
Programming is loading a data file that was
downloaded from the MACK database into
the ECU using V-MAC Dealer Programming
software.
3. The third phase is uploading.
Uploading is transferring a verification data
file (created during programming with
V-MAC Dealer Programming software) from
your PC to the MACK database using
V-MAC Online.

Page 122
8_341.bk Page 123 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


DEALER PROGRAMMING V-MAC ONLINE MAIN SCREEN
SOFTWARE VISUAL 76

IDENTIFICATION
V-MAC Online Screen Summaries
The following section is an introduction to the
V-MAC Online screens available through
MACKnet (accessed via the MACK Extranet).
This section is meant to familiarize you with the
various V-MAC Online screens. For detailed
information on how to use V-MAC Online, please
refer to “USING V-MAC ONLINE AND DEALER
PROGRAMMING” on page 137.

MACKnet LOG ON SCREEN


75 Figure 76 — V-MAC Online Main Menu

The V-MAC Online Menu provides four options to


choose from: Vehicle Information, Product
Software Download, Datafile Download and
Verification Upload.
1. Click on Vehicle Information to enter the
Select V-MAC System Type for Vehicle
Information screen (refer to “SYSTEM TYPE
VEHICLE INFORMATION SCREEN” on
page 124).
2. Click on Product Software Download to
enter the Product Software Download entry
form (refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
DOWNLOAD ENTRY FORM” on page 124).
Figure 75 — MACKnet Log On Screen 3. Click on Datafile Download to enter the
Datafile Download entry form (refer to
The MACKnet Log On screen allows you to enter “DATAFILE ENTRY FORM” on page 125).
the MACK database and use the V-MAC Online
software. 4. Click on Verification Upload to enter the
Verification Upload entry form (refer to
1. Enter your user identification information in “VERIFICATION UPLOAD ENTRY FORM”
the User ID field. on page 125).
2. Enter your password in the Password field.
If you want the PC you are using to
remember your user ID, click on the Save
My ID check box. You will still be required to
enter your password.
3. Click on the Log On button to enter the
V-MAC Online Main Menu.

Page 123
8_341.bk Page 124 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


SYSTEM TYPE VEHICLE INFORMATION The Product Software entry form permits you to
SCREEN download a product software file from the MACK
77 database via V-MAC Online.
1. Select the system type. Click on the V-MAC
button for class 8 vehicles. Or, click on the
VIP radio button if you need to download a
product software file for the Vehicle
Information Profiler™ (V.I.P.™).

The ECU Serial # field entry does not apply to the


V.I.P.™

2. After you have selected the desired system


type, enter the software version number in
the Software Version # field, and enter the
ECU serial number in the ECU Serial # field.
Figure 77 — Vehicle Information Select Screen
3. If you need to clear your selections, click on
The Select V-MAC System Type for Vehicle the Clear button. Or, if you are ready to
Information screen is divided into two V-MAC download the file, click on the Submit
system types: Class 6, 7 and 8 Vehicle button. The File Download dialog box will
Information and Freedom Medium Duty Vehicle appear, asking you to save the file.
Information (refer to Freedom™ Medium Duty 4. Click on the Save button. The Save As
Trucks V-MAC Software Support, MV8-105). dialog box will appear to save the product
1. Click on Class 6, 7 and 8 Vehicle software file. You can download the datafile
Information to access vehicle information to either a floppy disk or your computer hard
for class 6, 7 and 8 vehicles. You will be drive.
79
brought to the Mack Trucks Host menu
screens (refer to “MACK TRUCKS HOST
MENU” on page 126).

PRODUCT SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD ENTRY


FORM
78

Figure 79 — Product Software Save As Dialog Box

Figure 78 — Product Software Entry Form

Page 124
8_341.bk Page 125 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


DATAFILE ENTRY FORM 81

80

Figure 81 — Datafile Save As Dialog Box

VERIFICATION UPLOAD ENTRY FORM


Figure 80 — Datafile Entry Form 82

The Datafile entry form permits you to download


a reprogramming datafile from the MACK
database via V-MAC Online.
1. Enter the GSO and Chassis Serial number
in the GSO and Chassis Serial # fields. Or,
enter the vehicle identification number in the
VIN field.
2. Select the ECU/Module type. For class 8
vehicles, click on the appropriate V-MAC
ECU radio button.
3. If you need to clear your selections, click on
the Clear button. Or, if you are ready to
download the file, click on the Submit
button. The File Download dialog box will Figure 82 — Verification Upload Entry Form
appear, asking you to save the file.
4. Click on the Save button. The Save As The Verification Upload entry form allows you to
window will appear to save and download upload a verification file to the MACK database
the product software file. You can download via V-MAC Online. You can enter up to
the datafile to either a floppy disk or your 10 verification files at one time.
computer hard drive. 1. Enter the verification file name in the
numbered field entries. Or, simply click on
the Browse button to select the desired
verification file. If you click on the Browse
button, a Choose File window will appear.

Page 125
8_341.bk Page 126 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


83
MACK TRUCKS HOST MENU
84

Figure 83 — Choose File Dialog Box

2. Click on the Look In drop-down arrow and


select either the floppy drive or hard drive of
Figure 84 — Mack Trucks Host Menu
your computer, wherever you have saved
the verification file. The Mack Trucks Host menu, accessed from the
3. Click on the verification file and click on the Vehicle Information screen, contains the
Open button. The selected file will Electronically Controlled Vehicles Application
automatically appear in the verification file menu where you can view and modify vehicle and
field and will show the location where the file engine information for Class 6, 7 and 8 vehicles.
will be saved.
Select the F1 key to access the Administrative/
4. Click on the Submit button to begin Customer Information by GSO/CHASSIS or VIN
uploading the file to the MACK database. Or, entry form (refer to “F1 — ADMINISTRATIVE/
if you need to remove entries from the fields, CUSTOMER INFORMATION BY GSO/CHASSIS
click on the Clear button. OR VIN ENTRY FORM” on page 127).
If the verification upload was successful, you will Select the F3 key to access the Update Options
receive an “All Verification Successful” message form (refer to “F3 — UPDATE OPTIONS FORM”
box. on page 127).
In the Using V-MAC Online and Dealer Select the F5 key to access the Update
Programming section, you will learn how to use Calibration Codes entry form (refer to “F5 —
V-MAC Online in conjunction with Dealer UPDATE CALIBRATION CODES ENTRY FORM”
Programming. on page 127).

Select the F9 key to access the Engine ECU Part


Number Change entry form (refer to “F9 — EECU
PART NUMBER CHANGE ENTRY FORM” on
page 129).

Select the F11 key to access the Vehicle ECU


Part Number Change entry form (refer to “F11 —
VECU PART NUMBER CHANGE ENTRY
FORM” on page 129).

Select the F19 key to access the Add VIN/GSO/


Chassis entry form (refer to “F19 — ADD VIN/
GSO/CHASSIS ENTRY FORM” on page 130).

Page 126
8_341.bk Page 127 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


Select the F20 key to access the Install Engine The Update Options entry form displays what
entry form (refer to “F20 — INSTALL ENGINE options have been enabled and also allows you
ENTRY FORM” on page 130). to enable or disable options for the particular
chassis. Items with an “N” next to them indicate
that option is disabled. Items with a “Y” next to
F1 — ADMINISTRATIVE/CUSTOMER
them indicate that option is enabled. To enable or
INFORMATION BY GSO/CHASSIS OR VIN
disable options, follow the steps below:
ENTRY FORM
85 1. To enable an option, type over the “N” with a
“Y” and hit the Enter key.
2. To disable an option, type over the “Y” with
an “N” and hit the Enter key.
3. To exit the screen, hit the F10 key. After you
have enabled or disabled the options
wanted, you must now program the chassis
for these changes to take effect. Please
refer to Dealer Programming “PRODUCT
SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on
page 122.

F5 — UPDATE CALIBRATION CODES ENTRY


FORM
87

Figure 85 — Administrative/Customer Information by


GSO/CHASSIS or VIN Entry Form

The Administrative/Customer Information by


GSO/Chassis or Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) entry form permits you to view customer
information by GSO/Chassis or VIN. To view the
information, type in the GSO/Chassis number or
VIN and hit the Enter key. Click on the F10 key to
exit the screen.

F3 — UPDATE OPTIONS FORM


86

Figure 87 — Update Calibration Codes Entry Form

The Update Calibration Codes entry form permits


you to view and update calibration codes. Type in
the GSO/CHASSIS serial numbers or type in the
VIN and press the Enter key. The entry form will
then display the engine model, engine serial and
engine software part numbers.

Figure 86 — Update Options Entry Form

Page 127
8_341.bk Page 128 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


3. In the Calibration Code column, enter the
new Calibration Code number over the
current number displayed.
If the GSO/CHASSIS serial numbers or VIN is not
found in the database, a message near the lower 4. In the Change Category Code column, enter
left-hand side of the screen will be displayed, the appropriate Code Letter that best
indicating that the GSO/CHASSIS or VIN was not describes the reason for the change.
found. (Change Category Codes are listed at the
bottom of the F5 screen.)
5. Hit the F10 key to exit the screen when you
To change an Electronic Unit Pump (EUP) code,
are finished making your changes.
use the following steps:
1. In the Update Indicator column, enter “Y” The following table contains the editing functions
over the “N” along side of the cylinder associated with the F5 — Update Calibration
number of the EUP you want to change. Codes entry form:
2. In the EUP Serial Number column, enter the
new EUP serial number over the current
number displayed.

Column Item Function


Update Indicator N or Y must be displayed or an error message will be displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the
screen.
Cylinder Number This column will display cylinders 1 through 6.
EUP Serial Number r If this column is blank, an error message will be displayed in the lower left-hand corner of
the screen.
r Second position of the existing EUP serial number contains either a “B” (standard EUP) or
an “M” (CCRS). First position contains a “P” or “C” (remanufactured EUP).
r Second position of the new EUP serial number (whether it contains a B or an M) must be
the same for the other five existing EUP serial numbers. For example, if the new EUP serial
number for cylinder number 1 is 0B2M15K, then the rest of the EUP serial numbers must
also contain the B in the second position.
r If the EUP is remanufactured, then a P will be in the first position and a B in the second
position for the other EUPs.
r Step 7 and earlier engines must have a B in the second position of all their EUP serial
numbers or an error message will be displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
r Step 8 ASET™ AI engines must have an M in the second position of all their EUP serial
numbers or an error message will be displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
ASET™ AC engines must have an X in the second position or Y in the first position of all
their EUP serial numbers or an error message will display.
r Engines with a “C” (remanufactured CCRS) in the first position will display an “M” in other
EUPs.
r If the EUP serial number is changed, the calibration code must also be changed or an error
message will be displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
Calibration Code r If this column is blank, an error message will be displayed in the lower left-hand corner of
the screen.
r If the calibration code is changed, the EUP serial number must also be changed or an error
message will be displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the screen.
Change Category Code If the EUP serial number and calibration code are changed, a change category code must be
entered or an error message will be displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the screen.

Page 128
8_341.bk Page 129 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


F9 — EECU PART NUMBER CHANGE ENTRY F11 — VECU PART NUMBER CHANGE ENTRY
FORM FORM
88 89

Figure 88 — EECU Part Number Change Entry Form Figure 89 — VECU Part Number Change Entry Form

The EECU Part Number Change entry form The VECU Part Number Change entry form
allows you to change the Engine ECU hardware allows you to change the Vehicle ECU part
and purchase part numbers for a V-MAC or FIC number for V-MAC III modules only. To change
module. the information, enter the GSO/CHASSIS serial
numbers or VIN for the chassis you are selecting
To change the information, enter the GSO/ and use the following steps:
CHASSIS serial numbers or VIN for the chassis
1. In the VECU1 H/W Part field, type in the
you are selecting and perform the following steps:
V-MAC ECU hardware part number and hit
1. In the ECU1 H/W Part field, type in the the Enter key.
V-MAC ECU hardware part number and hit
2. In the Purchased Part field, type in the
the Enter key.
Purchased part number and hit the Enter
2. In the ECU2 H/W Part field, type in the FIC key. The software version number will
module part number and hit the Enter key. display in the Software Version field.
3. In the Purchased Part field, type in the 3. Hit the F10 key to exit the entry form when
Purchased part number and hit the Enter you are finished making your changes.
key. The software version number will
display in the Software Version field.
4. Hit the F10 key to exit the entry form when
you are finished making your changes.

Page 129
8_341.bk Page 130 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


F19 — ADD VIN/GSO/CHASSIS ENTRY FORM F20 — INSTALL ENGINE ENTRY FORM
90 91

Figure 90 — Add VIN/GSO/CHASSIS Entry Form Figure 91 — Install Engine Entry Form

The Add VIN/GSO/CHASSIS entry form allows The Install Engine entry form allows you to assign
you to add the VIN, GSO and Chassis. A record an available electronic engine to a particular VIN.
is created for a non-electronic VIN that has been To assign an engine, use the following steps.
converted to an electronic vehicle. To add the After the engine is assigned, selection of the data
information, use the following steps: file must be done for programming.
1. Enter the VIN in the VIN field. 1. In the VIN field, type in the VIN of the
chassis you want to have an engine
2. Enter the GSO serial number in the GSO
assignment.
field.
2. In the Engine Serial field, type in the Engine
3. Enter the CHASSIS serial number in the
Serial number you want assigned to the
Chassis field.
selected chassis. You must program the
4. Enter the Chassis Model Number in the chassis for the change to take place (please
Chassis Model field. refer to “USING V-MAC ONLINE AND
DEALER PROGRAMMING” on page 137).
5. Hit the Enter key when you are finished
making your entries. 3. Hit the Enter key when you are finished
making your entries.
6. Hit the F10 key to exit the entry form.
4. Hit the F10 key to exit the entry form.

Page 130
8_341.bk Page 131 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


Dealer Programming Software V-MAC NAVIGATOR BAR
93
Screen Summaries
V-MAC DEALER PROGRAMMING MENU
92

Figure 93 — V-MAC Navigator/Programming Bar

This sliding bar lets you navigate through the


Figure 92 — V-MAC Dealer Programming Menu
software.

To view the available programming options (refer Click on the V-MAC Navigator bar (a vertical bar
to “PROGRAMMING BAR” on page 132), click on on the left-hand side of the DEALER
Programming to access the drop-down box PROGRAMMING Menu) to “slide” out the bar for
located at the top of the screen or click on the viewing.
V-MAC Navigator bar located vertically at the left
of the screen (refer to “V-MAC NAVIGATOR BAR” Click on the V-MAC Programming bar to view
on page 131 for detailed instructions on how to the available programming options (refer to
use the Navigator bar). “PROGRAMMING BAR” on page 132).

To save customer data and view the available Click on the V-MAC Utilities bar (located above
programming options, click on Utilities located at V-MAC Programming) to save customer data and
the top of the screen to access the drop-down view the available programming options (refer to
box or click on the V-MAC Navigator bar located “UTILITIES BAR” on page 132).
vertically at the left of the screen to access the
Utilities bar (refer to “UTILITIES BAR” on page
132).

Page 131
8_341.bk Page 132 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


PROGRAMMING BAR Click on Flash V-MAC Software (Auto Detect) to
94 let the system detect the V-MAC level and type
required for the attached vehicle and to program
the VECU or EECU (as appropriate) with a
product software file (refer to “PRODUCT
SOFTWARE (FLASH) PROGRAMMING ENTRY
FORM” on page 136).

Click on Flash V-MAC III VECU Software to


program the VECU with a product software file
(refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE (FLASH)
PROGRAMMING ENTRY FORM” on page 136).

Click on Flash V-MAC III EECU Software to


program the EECU with a product software file
(refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE (FLASH)
PROGRAMMING ENTRY FORM” on page 136).

Figure 94 — V-MAC Navigator/Programming Bar Click on Flash V-MAC II Software to program the
ECU with a product software file (refer to
Click on Program V-MAC OEM Data “PRODUCT SOFTWARE (FLASH)
(AutoDetect) to let the system detect the V-MAC PROGRAMMING ENTRY FORM” on page 136).
level and type required for the attached vehicle
and to program the VECU or EECU (as Click on Flash V.I.P.™ Software to program the
appropriate) with a reprogramming data file (refer Vehicle Information Profiler (V.I.P.™) with a
to “MACK DATA PROGRAMMING ENTRY product software file (refer to “V.I.P.™ PRODUCT
FORM” on page 133). SOFTWARE (FLASH) PROGRAMMING ENTRY
FORM” on page 136).
Click on Program V-MAC III VECU OEM Data to
program the VECU with a reprogramming data UTILITIES BAR
file (refer to “MACK DATA PROGRAMMING
95
ENTRY FORM” on page 133).

Click on Program V-MAC III EECU OEM Data to


program the EECU with a reprogramming data
file (refer to “MACK DATA PROGRAMMING
ENTRY FORM” on page 133).

Click on Program V-MAC II OEM Data to


program the ECU with a reprogramming data file
(refer to “MACK DATA PROGRAMMING ENTRY
FORM” on page 133).

Click on Program V-MAC I OEM Data to program


the ECU with a reprogramming data file (refer to
“MACK DATA PROGRAMMING ENTRY FORM”
on page 133).
Figure 95 — V-MAC Utilities Bar
Click on Program ITC OEM Data to program the
ECU with a reprogramming data file (refer to
Click on the V-MAC Utilities bar located above
“MACK DATA PROGRAMMING ENTRY FORM”
the V-MAC Programming Bar to access the
on page 133).
V-MAC Utilities screen.

Page 132
8_341.bk Page 133 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


Click on Save V-MAC Customer Data
(AutoDetect) to let the system detect the V-MAC
level and type required for the attached vehicle
and to save customer data for the VECU or If product software programming is required, it
EECU (as appropriate). Refer to “SAVE must be done before datafile programming.
CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM” on page 134.
1. In the Select Reprogramming File field, click
Click on Save V-MAC III VECU Customer Data on the Browse button and select the
to save customer data for the VECU (refer to appropriate reprogramming data file. The
“SAVE CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM” on program should automatically select an
page 134). appropriate file.
2. In the Select Saved Customer Data File
Click on Save V-MAC III EECU Customer Data
Directory field, click on the Browse button
to save customer data for the EECU (refer to
and select the directory for the customer
“SAVE CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM” on
data file. The program should automatically
page 134).
select the appropriate directory unless the
module has been reflashed or replaced. In
Click on Save V-MAC II Customer Data to save
the latter case, the appropriate file will have
customer data for the ECU (refer to “SAVE
to be selected manually.
CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM” on page
134). 3. In the Select Verification File Directory field,
click on the Browse button and select the
Click on Save V-MAC I Customer Data to save directory where the verification file will be
customer data for the ECU (refer to “SAVE saved. The program should automatically
CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM” on page select the appropriate directory.
134).
4. In the Select Reason for Reprogramming
field, click on the drop box and select the
Click on V-MAC Preferences to customize the
appropriate reason for programming.
configuration settings (refer to “PREFERENCES
ENTRY FORM” on page 134).
r Choose 1. Validate Data Currently in
Module when verifying that the data in
MACK DATA PROGRAMMING ENTRY FORM the ECU is identical to data on the
96 database.

For programming Type 1 (Verifying/


reprogramming ECU data file), DEALER
PROGRAMMING will determine if the data on the
floppy disk matches the data in the ECU.

r Choose 2. Replacement of a Module


when replacing or upgrading an ECU.

r Choose 3. Erase both Vehicle and


Customer Passwords when erasing
customer passwords.

Figure 96 — MACK Data Programming Entry Form r Choose 4. Enable/Disable a Feature


when upgrading the data file after using
F3 Update Options on the database.

Page 133
8_341.bk Page 134 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


r Choose 5. Horsepower Change when PREFERENCES ENTRY FORM
updating the data file after a 98
horsepower change.

r Choose 6. Program after a CDS/


Extension Change when updating
CDS/Extension data.

r Choose 7. Program after V-MAC


Software Upgrade when
reprogramming after a product software
upgrade.

Not all these choices may be available.

5. Click on the Program button to start


programming.
Click on the Close button to abort saving
process.

SAVE CUSTOMER DATA ENTRY FORM


97

Figure 98 — Preferences Common Entry Form


99

Figure 97 — Save Customer Data Entry Form

Click on the Browse button and select the


directory in which the customer data file will be
saved.

Click on the Save button to start saving the


customer data file.

Click on the Close button to abort programming.

Figure 99 — Preferences DP Entry Form

Page 134
8_341.bk Page 135 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


This entry form consists of three screens, Default directories can be set for the following
Common, Service Software and V-MAC Dealer files:
Programming, and is used to configure the PC for
— Software Files
operation with DEALER PROGRAMMING.
— Reprogramming Files (ECU
The Common entry form is used to specify the reprogramming data and product
communications port to be employed. software files)
— Saved Customer Files (ECU customer
Click on the Common tab.
data files)
Determine your adapter type. To modify the non- — Verification Files (ECU verification files)
RP1210A-compliant adapter type selection, do
the following: Click on the OK button to save the current
settings as the default.
a. Click on the Mack Default radio button.
b. Click on the Port Number drop-down For V.I.P.™ programming, the “flash,” or
arrow and select the port number programming, baud rate speed may be adjusted.
desired. Click on the Advanced button. The Advanced
window will appear.
To modify the RP1210A-compliant adapter type 100

selection, do the following:


a. Click on the RP1210A Device Name
radio button.
b. Click on the Device Name drop-down
arrow and select the adapter desired.
c. Click on the Port drop-down arrow and
select the com port desired.
d. Click on the Protocol drop-down arrow
and select the protocol type desired
(protocol 1708 is recommended). Figure 100 — Advanced Window

e. Click on the Apply button to make the To change the flash speed from the default of
change. Fast, click on the Speed (Baud Rate) drop-down
f. Click on the OK button to save arrow and select Medium or Slow. Click on the
changes. OK button to save your changes.

In the Dealer Programming entry form, program For V-MAC Programming, 9600 baud rate is
error and debugging information logging can be used.
customized using the Enable Logging,
Application Log Level and Logfile Name fields.

Page 135
8_341.bk Page 136 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


PRODUCT SOFTWARE (FLASH) V.I.P.™ PRODUCT SOFTWARE (FLASH)
PROGRAMMING ENTRY FORM PROGRAMMING ENTRY FORM
101 102

Figure 101 — Product Software (Flash) Programming Figure 102 — V.I.P.™ Product Software (Flash)
Entry Form Programming Entry Form

1. In the Select Vehicle Software File or Select 1. In the VIP Software File field, click on the
Engine Software File field, click on the Browse button and select the appropriate
Browse button and select the appropriate product software file.
product software file. The V.I.P.™ software version number will be
The ECU software version and serial displayed.
number will be displayed.
2. If the V.I.P.™ software version number is
2. If the ECU serial number and software correct, click on the Program button to
version is correct, connect computer to begin programming.
vehicle using the serial link adapter and click Once programming has begun, do not
on the Program button to begin interrupt the process.
programming.
Once programming has begun, do not
interrupt the process.
It will take about 30 minutes to program the
V.I.P.™

It will take about 15 minutes to program the 3. A pop-up screen will appear after
VECU, and 30 to 35 minutes to program the downloading is complete. It will prompt the
EECU. user to cycle the key switch and click the
OK button to complete the process.
3. Cycle the ignition when prompted.
Click on the Close button to exit.
Click on the Close button to exit.

V.I.P.™ does not require data file programming.

Page 136
8_341.bk Page 137 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


USING V-MAC ONLINE AND 2. The second phase is programming.
DEALER PROGRAMMING Programming (flashing) is loading a product
software file that was downloaded from the
Remember when using V-MAC Online that MACK database into the ECU using V-MAC
Dealer Programming software consists of two Dealer Programming software.
programming portions: product software and data
file programming. As you may recall, both kinds
of programming have different file types. Let us Data File Programming
quickly review once more.
Reprogramming a data file is similar to product
software programming, but involves three distinct
The product software file-programming portion of
phases:
Dealer Programming uses two different types of
files: 1. The first phase is downloading.
r A customer data file is created whenever Downloading is receiving a data file from the
you save customer parameters. MACK database and transferring the file to
your PC using V-MAC Online.
r A product software file is downloaded from
the MACK database via V-MAC Online and 2. The second phase is programming.
reprograms (flashes) the ECU software or Programming is loading a data file that was
V.I.P.™ software. downloaded from the MACK database into
the ECU using V-MAC Dealer Programming
The data file-programming portion of Dealer software.
Programming uses three different types of files:
3. The third phase is uploading.
r A customer data file is created whenever Uploading is transferring a verification data
you save customer parameters. file (created during programming with
r A reprogramming (reference) data file is V-MAC Dealer Programming software) from
downloaded from the MACK database via your PC to the MACK database using
V-MAC Online and reprograms the ECU V-MAC Online.
data.
To sum it up
r A verification file is created after
programming is completed. You then upload r Downloading is the way to receive
the file to the MACK database via V-MAC information from the MACK database using
Online. V-MAC Online.
r Programming is the way to put the
information into the vehicle’s ECUs using
REVIEW DEALER Dealer Programming software.
PROGRAMMING PHASES r Uploading is the way to send the
Both product software programming and data file information back to the MACK database
programming involve phases. using V-MAC Online.

Product Software Programming


Reprogramming a product software file involves
two distinct phases.
1. The first phase is downloading.
Downloading is receiving a product software
file from the MACK database and
transferring the file to your PC using V-MAC
Online.

Page 137
8_341.bk Page 138 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


PUTTING IT ALL TOGETHER Step 2 — Save Customer Data (for
In this section, you will download and upload files VECU)
using V-MAC Online, and flash and program
While you are hooked up to the vehicle, launch
using Dealer Programming. The following
V-MAC Dealer Programming software and
example will use a file for a vehicle ECU. Your
access the Save VECU Customer Data screen.
objective will be to upgrade the VECU to a higher 103
level of software. For generic, basic programming
steps, please refer to “Overview of Basic
Programming Steps” on page 142.

Step 1 — Find Vehicle Information


(for VECU)
Before you can download a file from the MACK
database using V-MAC Online, you will need to
record the following information:
r Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
r VECU Software Version Number (in this
case, you will need to know the next higher
level of software to upgrade)
r VECU Serial Number Figure 103 — Save VECU Customer Data Entry Form

The above items can be found via the Vehicle Insert a floppy or use a location on your
Information screen (use V-MAC Service computer’s hard drive and click on the Save
Software) or Flash or Program OEM data screen button to save the VECU customer data (the file
(use V-MAC Dealer Programming). Whichever extension will be .dtv for V-MAC III VECU).
application you use, it will be necessary to hook
up to the vehicle.

Page 138
8_341.bk Page 139 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


Step 3 — Download Product Step 4 — Download Datafile (for
Software File (for VECU) VECU)
Enter the V-MAC Online Main Menu via While you are still in V-MAC Online, click on
MACKnet. Refer to “MACKnet LOG ON Datafile Download to enter the Datafile
SCREEN” on page 123 for instructions on how to Download entry form.
enter the V-MAC Online Main Menu. 105

Once you have entered the V-MAC Online Main


Menu, click on Product Software Download to
enter the Product Software Download entry form.
104

Figure 105 — Datafile Download Entry Form

When you have entered the Datafile Download


entry form, enter the VIN or GSO/CHASSIS serial
number and click on the V-MAC III Vehicle radio
Figure 104 — Product Software Download Entry Form button. Click on the Submit button to download
the datafile. When you are finished saving the file,
Insert the floppy that contains the VECU ensure that the reprogramming datafile (the file
customer data file into the computer floppy drive. extension will be .rfv for V-MAC III VECU) was
saved to the floppy disk or other designated
When you have entered the Product Software location.
Download entry form, type in the software
number that you are using to make the upgrade
and the vehicle ECU serial number you recorded
earlier. Select the vehicle system type (V-MAC)
and then click on the Submit button. When you
are finished saving the file, ensure that the
product software file (the file extension will be .sfv
for V-MAC III VECU) was saved to the floppy disk
or other designated location.

Page 139
8_341.bk Page 140 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


Step 5 — Program (Flash) VECU Step 6 — Program VECU
Launch V-MAC Dealer Programming software While you are still in V-MAC Dealer Programming
and enter the Flash VECU screen. software, enter the Program VECU OEM Data
106
screen and click on the RFV Browse button to
open the reprogramming datafile (.rfv). Click on
the DTV Browse button to save the customer
datafile (.dtv) if desired.
107

Figure 106 — Product Software Flash Programming


Entry Form

Click on the Browse button to select the product


software file. Click on the Program button to Figure 107 — Programming Entry Form
program (flash) the vehicle ECU. The flashing
sequence will take up to 40 minutes. When the Click on the Select Reason for Reprogramming
flashing session is over, wait for the “cycle the drop-down arrow and choose “Program after
power” message and follow as instructed. When Software Upgrade.” Click on the Program button.
the flashing sequence is over and the software
automatically transports you to the Dealer When the reprogramming process is complete
Programming Main Menu, check that the product (up to 35 minutes), check that the reprogramming
software file (.sfv) is gone from the floppy disk. file has been replaced with a verification file (.vev)
on the floppy disk.

Page 140
8_341.bk Page 141 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


Step 7 — Upload Verification File Step 8 — View MACK Host Vehicle
Re-enter V-MAC Online via MACKnet, and click Information Screen
on Verification Upload. The Verification Upload From the V-MAC Online Main Menu, click on
screen will appear. Class 6, 7 and 8 Vehicle. The MACK Host Menu
108
screen will appear.
109

Figure 108 — Verification Upload Screen


Figure 109 — Host Menu
Click on the Browse button to open and attach
the verification file. Click on the Submit button to Click on the F1 key to invoke the ADMIN/CUST
upload the verification file to the MACK database. BY GSO/CHAS/VIN screen.
When the upload is complete, check that the 110
verification file is gone from the floppy disk.

Figure 110 — ADMIN/CUST BY GSO/CHAS/VIN Screen

Enter the Chassis Model and Chassis Serial


number or the VIN and hit the Enter key. Check
that the verification file for the vehicle ECU was
received. If the upload was successful, a “Y” for
yes will appear next to “VECU Verified.”

Page 141
8_341.bk Page 142 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS
Overview of Basic Programming Steps
1. Determine which type of programming is needed (refer to the “SUMMARY OF PROGRAMMING
TYPES” table on page 142).
2. Identify and photocopy the appropriate worksheet (refer to the “WORKSHEET IDENTIFICATION”
table on page 143).
3. Perform each of the procedures for the specific programming type. Most worksheet items include
references for detailed procedures that more fully explain how to complete a programming step.
These “Detailed Programming Instructions” should only be used in conjunction with an appropriate
worksheet (refer to “Detailed Programming Instructions” on page 145).

If the vehicle is equipped with a Vehicle Information Profiler (V.I.P.™) display, the
V.I.P.™ may beep during programming and display the following message: “A loss of
communication on the J1587”. Disregard the message and acknowledge it only
when the programming is complete to prevent the V.I.P.™ from beeping again.

STEP 1 — DETERMINING THE PROGRAMMING TYPE


Refer to the following chart to determine the type of programming.

SUMMARY OF PROGRAMMING TYPES


Type Description of Programming Action File(s) to Download
T1 Verifying/reprogramming ECU data file(s) Reprogramming data file(s) — same version
T2 Replacing defective ECUs with the same P/N Reprogramming data file(s) — same version
T3 Erasing customer passwords Reprogramming data file(s) — same version
T4 Programming after F3 update Reprogramming data file(s) — same version
T5 Programming after HP change EECU reprogramming data file — new version
T6 Programming with new data file(s) Reprogramming data file(s) — new version
T7 Reprogramming ECU software file(s) Product software file(s) — same version
Reprogramming V.I.P.™ software file Reprogramming data file(s) — same version (does not
apply to V.I.P.™)
T8 Upgrading ECU software file(s) Product software file(s) — new version
Reprogramming data file(s) — new version
T9 Reprogramming CDS-EXT file(s) Reprogramming data file(s) — new version

The software will automatically run a comparison check for Type 1 and 4 through 6.
However, in the case of VECU CDS-EXT file, the comparison checking may not be
accurate; therefore, don’t rely on data comparison for the VECU.

Page 142
8_341.bk Page 143 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


STEP 2 — IDENTIFYING THE APPROPRIATE WORKSHEET
Locate the worksheet that corresponds to the programming type.

WORKSHEET IDENTIFICATION TABLE


* — Applies to V-MAC I, FIC and V-MAC II modules, too.

Reason for
Type Description Worksheet Location Reprogramming
T1 Verifying/reprogramming VECU data file Refer to TYPE 1 — VECU in T1
Programming Worksheets
T1 Verifying/reprogramming EECU* data file Refer to TYPE 1 — EECU in T1
Programming Worksheets
T1 Verifying/reprogramming both data files Refer to TYPE 1 — BOTH ECUs in T1
Programming Worksheets
T2 Replacing defective VECU with the same P/N Refer to TYPE 2 — VECU in T2
Programming Worksheets
T2 Replacing defective EECU* with the same P/N Refer to TYPE 2 — EECU in T2
Programming Worksheets
T2 Replacing both ECUs with the same P/N Refer to TYPE 2 — BOTH ECUs in T2
Programming Worksheets
T3 Erasing VECU customer passwords Refer to TYPE 3 — VECU in T3
Programming Worksheets
T3 Erasing EECU* customer passwords Refer to TYPE 3 — EECU in T3
Programming Worksheets
T3 Erasing all customer passwords Refer to TYPE 3 — BOTH ECUs in T3
Programming Worksheets
T4 Programming after VECU F3 update Refer to TYPE 4 — VECU in T4
Programming Worksheets
T4 Programming after EECU* F3 update Refer to TYPE 4 — EECU in T4
Programming Worksheets
T4 Programming after VECU and EECU F3 update Refer to TYPE 4 — BOTH ECUs in T4
Programming Worksheets
T5 Programming after HP change Refer to TYPE 5 (EECU ONLY) in T5
Programming Worksheets
T6 Programming VECU with new data file Refer to TYPE 6 — VECU in T1
Programming Worksheets
T6 Programming EECU* with new data file Refer to TYPE 6 — EECU in T1
Programming Worksheets
T6 Programming both ECUs with new data files Refer to TYPE 6 — BOTH ECUs in T1
Programming Worksheets
T7 Reprogramming VECU software file Refer to TYPE 7 — VECU in T7
Programming Worksheets
T7 Reprogramming EECU (for V-MAC II and V-MAC III Refer to TYPE 7 — EECU in T7
only) software file Programming Worksheets
T7 Reprogramming VECU and EECU software files Refer to TYPE 7 — BOTH ECUs in T7
Programming Worksheets
T7 Reprogramming V.I.P™ software file Refer to TYPE 7 — V.I.P.™ in N/A
Programming Worksheets

Page 143
8_341.bk Page 144 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


Reason for
Type Description Worksheet Location Reprogramming
T8 Upgrading VECU software file Refer to TYPE 8 — VECU in T7
Programming Worksheets
T8 Upgrading EECU (for V-MAC II and V-MAC III only) Refer to TYPE 8 — EECU in T7
software file Programming Worksheets
T8 Upgrading VECU and EECU software files Refer to TYPE 8 — BOTH ECUs in T7
Programming Worksheets
T9 Reprogramming CDS-EXT file Refer to TYPE 9 — CDS-EXT in T9
Programming Worksheets

Worksheets apply to V-MAC II programming also. The V-MAC II ECU should be


considered as the EECU.

STEP 3 — PERFORMING PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES


Perform the procedures outlined in the worksheet.

Page 144
8_341.bk Page 145 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


Detailed Programming Instructions SAVING CUSTOMER DATA

REMOVING FUSES Application: V-MAC Dealer Programming


Software
Application: Vehicle (mechanical procedure)
Path:
→DEALER PROGRAMMING
Before programming, all other control units using →Utilities
the J1587 line must be disabled. Failure to →Save Customer Data
disable other control units will result in an inability
to complete programming. If programming is
incomplete, the ECU passwords will be out of
phase and the ECU will be unusable.
If EECU customer data cannot be saved, the
electronic unit pumps must be recalibrated after
Systems that may use the J1587 line include (but programming is complete.
are not limited to): ABS/ATC, Automatic
transmissions, Co-Pilot, V.I.P.™ and
communication devices. RE-ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS
1. Determine all systems that use the J1587 Application: V-MAC Service Support Software
line and remove the appropriate fuses (refer
to the wiring diagrams provided with the Path:
vehicle).
→CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
2. Record the amperage and location of each
fuse that is removed (to allow for proper re- →(any choice except View/Print or Program Unit
installation once programming is complete). Pump Calibration)

Re-enter customer passwords, if applicable.


CLEARING FAULT TABLES Refer to the CUSTOMER DATA
Application: V-MAC Service Support Software PROGRAMMING section for detailed instructions
concerning customer passwords.
Path:
→SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS
→Fault Codes After programming, all passwords will return to
the default (10 blank spaces).
→Clear Fault Codes

Clear the VECU and/or EECU fault table(s).

Refer to the SERVICE DIAGNOSTICS section for


detailed instructions concerning fault tables.

Page 145
8_341.bk Page 146 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


PROGRAMMING THE REPROGRAMMING r Choose 5. Horsepower Change when
DATA FILE updating the data file after a
horsepower change.
Application: V-MAC Dealer Programming
Software
r Choose 6. Program after a CDS/
Extension Change when updating
Path:
CDS/Extension data.
→DEALER PROGRAMMING
r Choose 7. Program after V-MAC
→Program VECU or EECU OEM Data
Software Upgrade when
1. Insert the disk with the reprogramming data reprogramming after a product software
file(s) in the floppy drive. upgrade.
2. Access DEALER PROGRAMMING. 9. Click on the Program button.
3. Click on the V-MAC Programming tab.
4. Click on the appropriate selection (Program
V-MAC III VECU OEM Data or Program When reflashing an EECU from Step 4 to Step 5,
V-MAC III EECU OEM Data or Program turn off the exhaust brake option in the Engine
V-MAC II OEM Data or Program V-MAC I ECU customer parameter using CUSTOMER
OEM Data or Program ITC OEM Data). DATA PROGRAMMING after OEM.
5. Select the vehicle/engine reprogramming
file.
CHANGING THE ECU PART NUMBER
6. Select the customer data file.
Application: Mack Trucks Host menu via V-MAC
7. Select the directory for the verification data
Online
file.
8. Select the reason for reprogramming. Path:
→Host
r Choose 1. Validate Data Currently in
Module when verifying that the data in →Electronically Controlled Vehicles
the ECU is identical to data on the
→F9 EECU Part Number Change or F11
database.
VECU Part Number Change
1. Enter the VIN or GSO and serial number.
2. Enter the hardware part number in the H/W
For programming Type 1 (Verifying/ Part field and press Enter.
reprogramming ECU data file), the V-MAC III
The available software part numbers will
system will determine if the data on the floppy
appear.
disk matches the data in the ECU.
3. Use the TAB key to move to the desired
software part number, type x and press
r Choose 2. Replacement of a Module Enter.
when replacing or upgrading an ECU.

r Choose 3. Erase both Vehicle and


Customer Passwords when erasing
customer passwords.

r Choose 4. Enable/Disable a Feature


when upgrading the data file after using
F3 Update Options on the database.

Page 146
8_341.bk Page 147 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


USING THE F3 UPDATE OPTIONS SCREEN DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT SOFTWARE
FILE
Application: Mack Trucks Host menu via V-MAC
Online Application: V-MAC Online

Path: Path:
→Host →Product Software
→Electronically Controlled Vehicles 1. Connect to V-MAC Online and click on
Product Software Download.
→F3 Update Options
2. Enter the desired software version, enter the
The F3 Update Options screen allows the user to ECU serial number and click on the V-MAC
modify the data file to reflect a change (enabling radio button.
or disabling a feature or sensor).
3. Click on the Submit button.
A message will appear indicating that the file
is ready for transfer.
The ECU reprogramming data file must be 4. Insert a formatted disk into the floppy drive
downloaded (and the ECU must be and click on the Save button.
reprogrammed) if changes are made to the
feature options.
DOWNLOADING THE REPROGRAMMING
DATA FILE
Application: V-MAC Online

Depending on the truck configuration, some Path:


options may not be available.
→Datafile
1. Connect to V-MAC Online and click on
Datafile Download.
2. Enter the VIN or GSO and Chassis number.
The VECU reprogramming data file must be
downloaded (and the VECU must be 3. Click on the radio button next to “Vehicle” for
reprogrammed) if changes are made to sensor a VECU file or next to “Engine” for an EECU
information stored in the VECU. file for V-MAC III system type.
4. Click on the Submit button.
The File Download dialog box will appear,
asking you to save the file. Click on the Save
The EECU reprogramming data file must be button.
downloaded (and the EECU must be 5. The Save As dialog box will appear. Select
reprogrammed) if changes are made to sensor the .vip file and click the Save button. Be
information stored in the EECU. sure to select your PC’s hard drive to save
the file. VIP files are too large to save to a
floppy disk.

Page 147
8_341.bk Page 148 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE PROGRAMMING THE PRODUCT SOFTWARE
FILE
Application: V-MAC Online
Application: V-MAC Dealer Programming
Path: Software
→Verification
Path:
1. Insert the disk containing the verification file
→DEALER PROGRAMMING
into the floppy drive.
→Flash VECU or EECU Software or V-MAC II
2. Connect to V-MAC Online and click on
ECU or V.I.P.™
Verification Upload.
1. Insert the disk with the product software
3. Click on the Browse button and select the
file(s) in the floppy drive.
desired verification data file(s).
2. Access DEALER PROGRAMMING.
4. Click on the Submit button.
A message will appear indicating that the file 3. Click on the V-MAC Programming tab.
has been uploaded. 4. Click on the appropriate selection (Flash
V-MAC Software [AutoDetect] or Flash
DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT SOFTWARE V-MAC III VECU Software or Flash V-MAC
V.I.P.™ FILE III EECU Software or Flash V-MAC II
Software or Flash V.I.P.™ Software).
Application: V-MAC Online
5. Select the vehicle/engine/V.I.P.™
Path: reprogramming file (product software file)
and click on the Browse button.
→Product Software
The ECU or V.I.P.™ software version and
1. Connect to V-MAC Online, start V-MAC and serial number (serial number does not apply
click on Product Software Download. to V.I.P.™) will be displayed.
2. Click on the VIP radio button. 6. If the ECU or V.I.P.™ software version and
serial number (serial number does not apply
3. Enter the desired software version (refer to
to V.I.P.™) is correct, click on the Program
the V-MAC Configuration charts).
button.
4. Click on the Submit button. Once programming has begun, do not
The File Download dialog box will appear, interrupt the process.
asking to save the file. Click on the Save
button.
5. The Save As dialog box will appear. Select
the .vip file and click the Save button. Be It will take about 15 minutes to program the
sure to select your PC’s hard drive to save VECU, 30 to 35 minutes to program the EECU
the file. The VIP files are too large to save to and 30 minutes to program V.I.P.™
a floppy disk.
7. Cycle the ignition when prompted.
RECALIBRATING THE EUPS
Application: V-MAC Service Support Software

Path:
→CUSTOMER DATA PROGRAMMING
→Program Unit Pump Calibration

Refer to the CUSTOMER DATA


PROGRAMMING section for detailed instructions
concerning EUP calibration.

Page 148
8_341.bk Page 149 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


Programming Worksheets TYPE 1 — EECU

TYPE 1 — VECU Use this worksheet when verifying the current


data file or reprogramming the EECU with the
Use this worksheet when verifying the current same data file. (Applies to V-MAC I, FIC and
data file or reprogramming the VECU with the V-MAC II modules, too.)
same data file.
첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data
첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page 147).
147).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to “REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to
첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145).
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145).
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page 146).
146).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE- ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on page 145).
page 145).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer
첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE” on page 148).
on page 148).

Page 149
8_341.bk Page 150 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


TYPE 1 — BOTH ECUs TYPE 2 — VECU
Use this worksheet when verifying the current Use this worksheet when replacing a defective
data file or reprogramming both ECUs with the VECU with a new VECU that has the same
same data files. purchase P/N.
첸 Download both VECU and EECU 첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data
reprogramming data files (refer to file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
“DOWNLOADING THE REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page 147).
147).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to “REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to
첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145).
to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page
첸 Install a new VECU.
145).
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
146).
146).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
page 145).
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
146). 첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING 첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer
FAULT TABLES” on page 145). to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
on page 148).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 145).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
files (refer to “UPLOADING THE
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 148).

Page 150
8_341.bk Page 151 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


TYPE 2 — EECU TYPE 2 — BOTH ECUs
첸 Use this worksheet when replacing a 첸 Use this worksheet when replacing both
defective EECU with a new EECU that has ECUs with new ECUs that have the same
the same purchase P/N. (Applies to purchase P/Ns.
V-MAC I, FIC and V-MAC II modules, too.)
첸 Download both VECU and EECU
첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data reprogramming data files (refer to
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE “DOWNLOADING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
147). 147).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to 첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145). “REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to 첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145). to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page
145).
첸 Install a new EECU.
첸 Install new ECUs.
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145). 첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE 첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
146). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
146).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 145). 첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on 첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
page 145). (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
146).
첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
on page 148).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 145).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
files (refer to“UPLOADING THE
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 148).

Page 151
8_341.bk Page 152 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


TYPE 3 — VECU TYPE 3 — EECU
Use this worksheet when erasing the VECU Use this worksheet when erasing the EECU
customer passwords. customer passwords. (Applies to V-MAC I, FIC
and V-MAC II modules, too.)
첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE 첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
147). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
147).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145). 첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145). 첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145).
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145). 첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE 첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
146). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
146).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 145). 첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on 첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
page 145). ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 145).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE” 첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer
on page 148). to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
on page 148).

Page 152
8_341.bk Page 153 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


TYPE 3 — BOTH ECUs TYPE 4 — VECU
첸 Use this worksheet when erasing customer Use this worksheet when programming the VECU
passwords for both ECUs. after modifying the data file using F3 Update
Options.
첸 Download both VECU and EECU
reprogramming data files (refer to 첸 Modify the VECU data file using F3 Update
“DOWNLOADING THE Options (refer to “USING THE F3 UPDATE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page OPTIONS SCREEN” on page 147).
147).
첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
147).
첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer
to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
145). “REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to 첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145). “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file 첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE “CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
146).
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145). 146).
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file 첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
146).
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING page 145).
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
page 145).
on page 148).
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
files (refer to “UPLOADING THE
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 148).

Page 153
8_341.bk Page 154 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


TYPE 4 — EECU TYPE 4 — BOTH ECUs
Use this worksheet when programming the EECU Use this worksheet when programming both
after modifying the data file using F3 Update ECUs after modifying the data file using F3
Options. (Applies to V-MAC I, FIC and V-MAC II Update Options.
modules, too.)
첸 Modify both VECU and EECU data files
첸 Modify the EECU data file using F3 Update using F3 Update Options (refer to “USING
Options (refer to “USING THE F3 UPDATE THE F3 UPDATE OPTIONS SCREEN” on
OPTIONS SCREEN” on page 147). page 147).
첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data 첸 Download both VECU and EECU
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE reprogramming data files (refer to
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page “DOWNLOADING THE
147). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
147).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145). 첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145). 첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer
to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
145).
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page 첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
146). (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
146).
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 145). 첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer 146).
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
on page 148).
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 145).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
files (refer to “UPLOADING THE
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 148).

Page 154
8_341.bk Page 155 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


TYPE 5 (EECU ONLY) TYPE 6 — VECU
Use this worksheet when programming the EECU 첸 Use this worksheet when programming the
after the data file has been modified to reflect a VECU with a new data file.
horsepower change. (Applies to V-MAC I, FIC
첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data
and V-MAC II modules, too.)
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE 147).
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
147).
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145).
첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145).
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE 146).
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
146).
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE- page 145).
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
page 145).
첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer on page 148).
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
on page 148).

Page 155
8_341.bk Page 156 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


TYPE 6 — EECU TYPE 6 — BOTH ECUs
Use this worksheet when programming the EECU Use this worksheet when programming both
with a new data file. (Applies to V-MAC I, FIC and ECUs with new data files.
V-MAC II modules, too.)
첸 Download both VECU and EECU
첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data reprogramming data files (refer to
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE “DOWNLOADING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
147). 147).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to 첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145). “REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to 첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145). to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page
145).
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145). 첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE 첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
146). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
146).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 145). 첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on 첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
page 145). (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
146).
첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
on page 148).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 145).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
files (refer to “UPLOADING THE
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 148).

Page 156
8_341.bk Page 157 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


TYPE 7 — VECU TYPE 7 — EECU
Use this worksheet when reprogramming the 첸 Use this worksheet when reprogramming
VECU with the same product software file. the EECU with the same product software
file. (Applies to V-MAC II module, too.)
첸 Download the VECU product software file
(refer to “DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT 첸 Download the EECU product software file
SOFTWARE FILE” on page 147). (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT
SOFTWARE FILE” on page 147).
첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE 첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
147). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
147).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145). 첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145). 첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145).
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145). 첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Program the VECU product software file
(refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE 첸 Program the EECU product software file
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 122). (refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 122).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE 첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
146). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
146).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 145). 첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on 첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
page 145). ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 145).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE” 첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer
on page 148). to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
on page 148).

Page 157
8_341.bk Page 158 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


TYPE 7 — BOTH ECUs TYPE 7 — V.I.P.™
Use this worksheet when reprogramming both Use this worksheet when reprogramming the
ECUs with the same product software files. V.I.P.™ with a same product software file.
첸 Download both VECU and EECU product 첸 Download the V.I.P.™ product software file
software files (refer to “DOWNLOADING (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT
THE PRODUCT SOFTWARE FILE” on page SOFTWARE V.I.P.™ FILE” on page 148).
147).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
첸 Download both VECU and EECU “REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
reprogramming data files (refer to
첸 Program the V.I.P.™ product software file
“DOWNLOADING THE
(refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 122).
147).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer
to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page
145).
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Program the VECU product software file
(refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 122).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
146).
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Program the EECU product software (refer
to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 122).
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
146).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 145).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
files (refer to “UPLOADING THE
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 148).

Page 158
8_341.bk Page 159 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


TYPE 8 — VECU TYPE 8 — EECU
첸 Use this worksheet when reprogramming Use this worksheet when reprogramming the
the VECU with a new product software file. EECU with a new product software file. (Applies
to V-MAC II module, too.)
첸 Change the VECU part number (refer to
“CHANGING THE ECU PART NUMBER” on 첸 Change the EECU part number (refer to
page 146). “CHANGING THE ECU PART NUMBER” on
page 146).
첸 Download the VECU product software file
(refer to “DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT 첸 Download the EECU product software file
SOFTWARE FILE” on page 147). (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT
SOFTWARE FILE” on page 147).
첸 Download the VECU reprogramming data
file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE 첸 Download the EECU reprogramming data
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page file (refer to “DOWNLOADING THE
147). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
147).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145). 첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
첸 Save VECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145). 첸 Save EECU customer data (refer to
“SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page 145).
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145). 첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Program the VECU product software file
(refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE 첸 Program the EECU product software file
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 122). (refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 122).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE 첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page (refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
146). REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
146).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 145). 첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on 첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
page 145). ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 145).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload the VECU verification data file (refer
to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE” 첸 Upload the EECU verification data file (refer
on page 148). to “UPLOADING THE VERIFICATION FILE”
on page 148).

Page 159
8_341.bk Page 160 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

DEALER PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE


TYPE 8 — BOTH ECUs TYPE 9 — CDS-EXT
Use this worksheet when reprogramming both Use this worksheet when reprogramming the
ECUs with new product software files. VECU after modifying the data file using the F3
Update Options.
첸 Change both VECU and EECU part
numbers (refer to “CHANGING THE ECU 첸 Update the CDS-EXT VECU data file using
PART NUMBER” on page 146). F3 Update Options (refer to “USING THE F3
UPDATE OPTIONS SCREEN” on page
첸 Download both VECU and EECU product
147). If the vehicle is V-MAC II and already
software files (refer to “DOWNLOADING
has an extension file, reflash. If the vehicle is
THE PRODUCT SOFTWARE FILE” on page
a V-MAC III, refer to Type 4 VECU. For
147).
V-MAC II, update the ECU part number. For
첸 Download both VECU and EECU V-MAC III, update the CDS part number.
reprogramming data files (“DOWNLOADING
THE REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on
page 147).
첸 Remove applicable fuses (refer to
“REMOVING FUSES” on page 145).
첸 Save VECU and EECU customer data (refer
to “SAVING CUSTOMER DATA” on page
145).
첸 Clear the VECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Program the VECU product software file
(refer to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 122).
첸 Program the VECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
146).
첸 Clear the EECU fault table (refer to
“CLEARING FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Program the EECU product software (refer
to “PRODUCT SOFTWARE
PROGRAMMING (PSP)” on page 122).
첸 Program the EECU reprogramming data file
(refer to “PROGRAMMING THE
REPROGRAMMING DATA FILE” on page
146).
첸 Clear all fault tables (refer to “CLEARING
FAULT TABLES” on page 145).
첸 Re-enter customer passwords (refer to “RE-
ENTERING CUSTOMER PASSWORDS” on
page 145).
첸 Reinstall all removed fuses.
첸 Upload VECU and EECU verification data
files (refer to “UPLOADING THE
VERIFICATION FILE” on page 148).

Page 160
8_341.bk Page 161 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

Page 161
8_341.bk Page 162 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

APPENDIX
CUSTOM DEFINED r 3MS31P7 — Combination of 3MS31and
3MS31P6 (see above descriptions).
STATEMENTS
r 3MS31P8 — Provides a speed switch based
To support special requirements, a Custom on vehicle speed; relay driver VJ3-12 will be
Defined Statement may be provided as part of the energized any time the vehicle speed is less
vehicle’s original build. Custom Defined than the threshold specified in the Custom
Statements are factory set and cannot be Parameter 1 field.
enabled or disabled by the dealer. Some Custom
Defined Statements require up to two parameters If the Custom Parameter 1 field is set to 0, the
and contain settings that are programmed in default vehicle speed threshold (15 mph/24 kph)
Custom Parameter 1 and Custom Parameter 2 will apply. To set a custom vehicle speed
fields. The CDS part numbers can be found in the threshold, go to Fleet Data/Fleet Display & Trip
Owner Storage area. Brief descriptions of the Settings. At Customer Parameter 1, choose Road
available Custom Defined Statements are listed Speed as the data type and enter the value in the
below: Customer Parameter 1 field.
r 3MS31P1 — Used with an Allison HT
transmission; relay VJ3-10 is controlled Example: If a vehicle speed threshold of 10 mph
based on the accelerator pedal position. is desired, choose Road Speed and enter 10.
The scaled value will be 4120.
r 3MS31P2 — Prevents the user from
changing certain customer specific settings. 3MS31P9 — Used with an Allison HT
r 3MS31P3 (Starter Lockout) — Uses a transmission (see 3MS31P8).
normally closed relay that is powered by
VJ3-12; the relay is energized (opened) 3MS31P10 — Prevents the user from changing
once the engine is started. certain customer specific settings.
r 3MS31P4 (Oil Level Shutdown) — Uses a
normally open oil level switch that closes
when the oil level is low; when closed, this
switch provides 12 volts to switch input 3MS31P10 is not available with Step 4/5
VJ1-15 (fan override). configuration.
For oil level shutdown to operate, pin VJ1-15
must be mapped to the fan override function. 3MS31P11 — Provides a kill switch to stop
engine when activated; this switch is powered by
VJ1-14. Fault blink code 4-8 (MID 142, SID 151,
FMI 0) will be logged if kill switch is applied.
If an oil level shutdown occurs, an oil pressure
fault will be logged.

3MS31P11 is not available with Step 4/5


configuration.

3MS31P4 is not available with Step 4


configuration. 3MS31P12 — Combination of 3MS31P3 and
3MS31P11 (see above descriptions).
r 3MS31P5 — Combination of 3MS31P3 and
3MS31P4 (see above descriptions).
r 3MS31P6 (Neutral to Range Shift Inhibit) — 3MS31P12 is not available with Step 4/5
Uses a normally open relay powered by configuration.
VJ3-12; the relay is energized any time the
engine speed is below 900 rpm, allowing an
automatic transmission to be shifted from
NEUTRAL to DRIVE.

Page 162
8_341.bk Page 163 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

APPENDIX
3MS31P13 (Fire Apparatus Warning) — Uses 3MS31P18 (Allison HT, Neutral to Range Shift
remote engine oil pressure (VJ3-12) and coolant Inhibit and Transmission Temp. Shutdown
temperature (VJ3-10) lamp drives for fire Fault) — Used with Allison HT transmission.
apparatus.

3MS31P14 (Allison HT transmission with retarder


control) — Slows truck without applying the 3MS31P19 and 3MS31P21 (see below) are not
brakes. available with Step 4/5/6 configuration.

3MS31P19 (Allison HT, Neutral to Range Shift


3MS31P14 and 3MS31P15 (see below) are not Inhibit, Starter Lockout and Transmission Temp.
available with Step 4/5 configuration. Shutdown Fault) — Used with Allison HT
transmission.

3MS31P15 (Allison HT modulator and Starter 3MS31P20 (Vehicle Speed Based Daytime
Lockout) — Prevents starter engagement while Running Light Override and Temp-A-Start™*
engine is running. Control) — Pressing the fan override switch
(VJ1-15) disables Daytime Running Light
momentarily (for 30 seconds with DRL disable
switch) with road speed below 30 mph and
3MS31P16, 3MS31P17, 3MS31P18, Temp-A-Start™ clutch disable relay driver will
3MS31P20, 3MS31P24 and 3MS31P25 (see latch the relay when the clutch is pushed. If
below) are not available with Step 4/5 Custom Parameter 1 is zero, the Road Speed
configuration. threshold will be 30 mph.

(*Temp-A-Start is a registered trademark of the


3MS31P16 (Allison HT Control, Starter Lockout TAS Distributing Company, Inc.)
and Transmission Temp. Shutdown Fault) — A
transmission temperature switch closes at 275°F The Road Speed threshold can be changed by
(135°C) sending a signal to VJ1-15. When this setting a non-zero in Custom Parameter 1.
occurs, a fault blink code 4-8 (MID 142, SID 151, Likewise, if Custom Parameter 2 is zero, the
FMI 8) will be logged rather than the shutdown lights will be off for a maximum of 30 seconds.
alarm sounding. The engine will shut down The time can be changed by setting Custom
unless the override switch is pressed. Pressing Parameter 2 to a non-zero value (seconds).
the override switch will provide another
30 seconds of operation one time. The 3MS31P21 — Illuminates trailer stop lamps when
Transmission warning and shutdown are not J-Tech engaged via switches.
controlled by the shutdown settings in Customer
Data Programming. Disable the Transmission 3MS31P23 — Temp-A-Start™ clutch disable
temperature warning and shutdown by setting relay driver will latch the relay when the clutch is
Custom Parameter 1 to a non-zero value. pushed in.

3MS31P17 (ABF — Sleeper Cab Settings) — 3MS31P24 — (Vehicle Speed Based Daytime
Prevents the user from changing certain Running Light Override) — Disables Daytime
customer specific settings. Running Light momentarily (for 30 seconds with
DRL disable switch) with road speed below
30 mph without fan override switch.

Page 163
8_341.bk Page 164 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

APPENDIX
3MS31P25 — (Vehicle Speed Based Daytime 3MS31P27 — (ABF Day Cab) — Prevents the
Running Light Override) — Disables Daytime user from changing certain customer-specific
Running Light momentarily (for 30 seconds with settings.
DRL disable switch) with road speed below
30 mph with fan override switch. Uses VJ1-16 3MS31P28 — (ABF Sleeper Cab) — Prevents
instead of VJ1-19. the user from changing certain customer-specific
settings.
3MS31P26 — (Vehicle Speed Based Daytime
Running Light Override) — Disables Daytime 3MS31P29 — Telma Retarder Control using
Running Light momentarily (for 30 seconds with driver VJ3-12. The retarder is enabled above
DRL disable switch) with road speed below 2 mph or a customer road speed setting in
30 mph with fan override switch. Uses VJ1-16 Customer Parameter 1 (whichever value is
instead of VJ1-19. greater).

Temp-A-Start™ clutch disable relay driver will 3MS31P30 — Same as 3MS31P27 but with
latch the relay when the clutch is pushed in. Uses 3.21 carrier ratio.
VJ3-10.
3MS31P32 — DRL enabled via engine oil
pressure using driver VJ3-10.

3MS31P27, 3MS31P28 and 3MS31P30 (see the


following) are not available with Step 4/5/6/7
configuration.

Page 164
8_341.bk Page 165 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

GLOSSARY

GLOSSARY

Page 165
8_341.bk Page 166 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

GLOSSARY
TECHNICAL TERMINOLOGY ABBREVIATIONS
CDP — Customer Data Programming
Software Terminology
Button — A rectangular area that represents an CDS — Customer Defined Statement
option or reply.
ECU — Electronic Control Unit
Display Screen — A screen that displays
information. EECU — Engine Electronic Control Unit

Entry Form — A screen, or portion of a screen, EHT — Electronic Hand Throttle


with one or more areas to be filled in by the user.
These areas are called fields. EUP — Electronic Unit Pump

Message Box — A box (containing a message) MDP — MACK Data Programming


that appears on the screen, as needed.
PC — Personal Computer
Menu — A screen, or portion of a screen,
containing a list of items that can be selected. PSP — Product Software Programming

Screen Status Line — An area located on the PTO — Power Take-Off


bottom of the screen that displays relevant
information. RAM — Random Access Memory

Selection Screen — A screen where the user SD — Service Diagnostics


can select items or settings.
SSC — Single Speed Control
Programming Security Screen — A security
control screen that requires entering a password VECU — Vehicle Electronic Control Unit
to gain access to certain programming options. If
a valid password is not entered, the user will not V.I.P.™ — Vehicle Information Profiler
be allowed to continue programming the selected
option. V-MAC — Vehicle Management and Control
System

VSC — Variable Speed Control

Page 166
8_341.bk Page 167 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

FEATURE INDEX

FEATURE INDEX

Page 167
8_341.bk Page 168 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

FEATURE INDEX
A Custom Cruise Control ................................... 72
Access P Custom EHT Control Enabled ......................... 85
% Mechanic Power Limit ......................... 99 Custom Parameters ....................................... 109
Access S Customer Defined Labels ............................... 114
Mechanic Road Speed Limit .................... 99 Customer Torque Limit Gear Ratio ................. 69
Access T Customer Torque Limit.................................... 69
Distance Before Shutdown ...................... 99 Cylinder Balance Test ..................................... 35
Distance Remaining After Shutdown Cylinder Cut-Out Test ..................................... 35
Lamp ON .................................... 99
D
Time Before Shutdown ............................ 99
Data Save Mode ............................................ 106
Active Faults While Monitoring List ................. 33
Default Display Settings .................................. 35
Advance to Next Trip via Display ................... 100
Delay Engine Brake Application in Cruise ...... 71
Air Conditioning Installed Option ..................... 97
Demand Driver ID to Operate ......................... 98
Air Conditioning Override Time ...................... 94
Demand ID to Continue Running Beyond
Air Temp. Fan Engagement Threshold .......... 94
30 Seconds ................................................. 98
Alert Blackout Start Time, GMT ...................... 107
Detect Loss of Signal from
Alert Blackout Stop Time, GMT ...................... 107
MPH Sensor ................................................ 69
Allow Fan Override When Moving .................. 81
Disable Cruise Control .................................... 83
Allow Fan Override When Parked .................. 81
Disable Sweet Spot ........................................ 101
Alternator High Voltage Fault Threshold ........ 68
Disable Torque Limit with PTO........................ 70
Alternator Low Voltage Fault Threshold ......... 68
Display Screen Snapshots
Ambient Air Temperature Option..................... 77
Capturing Snapshots ............................... 33
Maximum Ambient Air............................... 77
Printing Snapshots ................................... 38
Minimum Ambient Air................................ 77
Viewing Snapshots .................................. 41
Automatic Transmission Temperature
Display Settings
Warning and Shutdown ............................... 73
Clearing Current Selections ..................... 34
B Saving Default Selections ........................ 39
Battery Low Voltage Fault Threshold ............. 68 Display Trip Information on V.I.P.™ ............... 101
Blackout Mode Enabled ................................. 107 Downloading the Product Software File ......... 147
Downloading the Product Software
C V.I.P.™ File ................................................. 148
Calibrate Throttle Pedal................................... 33 Downloading the Reprogramming
Capturing Display Screen Snapshots.............. 33 Data File ...................................................... 147
Carrier Ratio ................................................... 66 Driver Event Exception Triggers
Changing Engine Idle Speed .......................... 33 Company Limit Engine Speed ................. 111
Changing Governor Type ............................... 34 Fueled Engine Speed .............................. 110
Changing the ECU Part Number .................... 129 Fueled Vehicle Overspeed ...................... 111
Chassis DYNO Mode ..................................... 34 PTO 1 Enabled ........................................ 110
Clearing Current Selections ............................ 34 PTO 2 Enabled ........................................ 110
Clearing Fault Tables ..................................... 34 Severe Engine Speed .............................. 110
Coolant Level Shutdown ................................ 73 Vehicle Overspeed .................................. 111
Coolant Temperature Shutdown .................... 73 Driver Event Summary List ............................. 111
Coolant Temperature Fan Engagement Driver Event Summary Time .......................... 110
Threshold .................................................... 94 Driver ID Settings ........................................... 114
Cruise Control Driver Reset Maintenance Items
Accel Bump Speed .................................. 83 via V.I.P.™ ................................................... 100
Autoresume with Clutch .......................... 83 Driveshaft PTO Dropout Enabled ................... 95
Bump Speed ............................................ 84 Driveshaft PTO Dropout Threshold ................ 96
Decel Bump Speed .................................. 83 Driveshaft PTO 2 Option ................................ 79
Engagement/Dropout Requirements ....... 85
Hold to Nearest ........................................ 84 E
Cruise Control Mode ....................................... 83 Edit Owner Storage ........................................ 65
Cruise Max Road Speed ................................ 84 Electronic Hand Throttle SSC RPM ............... 86
Cruise Min Road Speed ................................. 84 Enable Cruise Button Bonus ........................... 68
Cruise Switch Disables Super 10 Top 2 ......... 72 Enable if Fault Incorrect Gear Ratio ................ 70

Page 168
8_341.bk Page 169 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

FEATURE INDEX
Engage Fan with Engine Brake ......................82 Ramp Rate ...............................................88
Engage Fan with PTO ON ..............................82 Single Speed Control (SSC) .....................85
Engine Brake Installed ....................................96 Hard Braking Threshold ..................................109
Engine Brake Test ...........................................35 High Idle Engine Speed ..................................94
Engine Compression Test ...............................36 Hold Electrical Power ON Until Vehicle
Engine Load Threshold for No Stopped .......................................................71
MPH Signal ..................................................67
Engine Overspeed Fault Threshold ................72 I
Engine Overspeed Logging (Severe) .............108 Idle Cooldown Feature Enabled ......................74
Engine Overspeed Logging with Fuel .............108 Idle Data Type on V.I.P.™ ..............................106
Engine Overspeed, Company Limit ................108 Idle Logging Delay ..........................................108
Engine Run-Up Test ........................................36 Idle Shutdown ..................................................75
Engine Sleep Mode ........................................95 Idle Shutdown if Hand Throttle Control
Engine Sleep Mode Alert ................................71 Active ...........................................................75
Exhaust Brake Installed ..................................96 Idle Shutdown if in Sleeper Mode ...................76
Exhaust Temperature .....................................74 Idle Shutdown if in Sleeper Mode with
PTO 4 Fast Idle ...........................................76
F Idle Shutdown if % Load Used Higher Than
Failed MPH Sensor Engine Power Limit .........68 Threshold .....................................................75
Fan Override Time When Moving ...................81 Idle Shutdown if PTO Active ...........................75
Fault Codes Idle Shutdown if Single Speed Control
Clearing Fault Tables ...............................34 Active ...........................................................75
Printing Fault Tables ................................38 Idle Shutdown % Load Threshold ...................79
Viewing Active Faults ...............................40 Idle Shutdown Timer .......................................78
Viewing Fault Tables ................................41 Idle Shutdown Warm-Up Temperature ...........78
Fault Monitoring During Live Parameter Idle Shutdown Warm-Up Timer ......................78
Monitoring..................................................36 Idle Shutdown Warning Time ..........................78
Fault Reporter ..................................................36 Incident Log Filter and Trigger Settings ..........111
Fault Reporter Advanced Setup ......................37 Inhibit Cruise Control with PTO ON ................79
Fault Reporter Configuration ..........................37 Initial Set using Resume Switch .....................79
Fleet Fuel Economy Target ............................105
Fuel Calibration ...............................................98 L
Fuel Economy Type ........................................72 Length of Driver Trip Code .............................107
Fuel Temperature Sensor Applied ..................96 Limit Power if Electrical Fault from
MPH Sensor ................................................69
G Limit Power if No Signal from
GuardDog™ Enabled .....................................105 MPH Sensor ................................................69
GuardDog™ Low Fuel Level Warning Limited Power Mode
Threshold % .................................................105 % Power Limit if No ID Entered ................98
Limited Time Mode
H % Power Limit Before Shutdown ..............98
Hand Throttle Low Idle Speed Adjust with Switches .............71
Accel Bump Speed ...................................86 Lower Gear Road Speed Limit .......................67
Accel Ramp Rate .....................................87 Lower Gear Road Speed Limit Option ............71
Autoset .....................................................85
Decel Bump Speed ..................................86 M
Decel Ramp Rate .....................................87 MACK PowerLeash™ Engine Brake
Dropout Above Maximum Speed .............86 Installed ........................................................96
Engagement/Dropout Requirements ........88 Maintenance Broadcast Schedule ..................107
Engine Speed Limit ..................................88 Maintenance Data Log
Hold to Minimum Speed ...........................86 Resetting the Maintenance Data Log .......39
Hold to Nearest ........................................87 Saving the Maintenance Data Log ...........39
Jump to Min Speed ..................................85 Viewing the Maintenance Data Log ..........42
Max Road Speed ......................................88 Maintenance Monitor Schedule ......................65
Max Set Speed .........................................87 Mechanic Road Speed Limit............................99
Min Set Speed ..........................................87

Page 169
8_341.bk Page 170 Wednesday, October 23, 2002 1:00 PM

FEATURE INDEX
N Reset Oil Change via Electronic Dash ............ 92
Number of ID Attempts ................................... 98 Reset Predictive Oil Change via Override
Switch .......................................................... 104
O Resetting the Maintenance Data Log .............. 39
Oil Level Sensor Available ............................. 96 Resetting the Vehicle Data Log....................... 39
Oil Pressure Shutdown ................................... 73 Road Speed Limit ...................................... 67, 90
Oil Temperature Sensor Available ................. 97 Road Speed Pickup Teeth ............................. 67
Output Boost Pressure on J1587 ................... 96
S
P Saving Customer Data ................................... 145
Parameter Monitoring Saving Parameter Defaults ............................. 39
Active Faults While Monitoring List .......... 33 Saving Vehicle Data ....................................... 39
Clearing Current Selections ..................... 34 Service Brake Fault Threshold with
Fault Monitoring ....................................... 36 Engine Brake .............................................. 72
Live Monitoring ........................................ 37 Set Time and Date ......................................... 65
Paused Monitoring ................................... 38 Set/Resume Fault Diagnostic ......................... 80
Saving Default Selections ........................ 30 Set/Resume Switch State ............................... 79
Parameter Selection Single Press of Resume to Accelerate ........... 79
Using Default Selections .......................... 37 Smart Fan Installed ........................................ 95
Using SAE Parameter Menu .................... 37 Source of Driver Name for Trip ...................... 106
Park Brake Check to Enable PTO .................. 89 Switch Assignments ....................................... 80
Predictive Oil Change...................................... 38 Switch Status Display ..................................... 42
Print Current Parameters ............................... 65
Printing Display Screen Snapshots ................. 38 T
Printing Fault Tables ....................................... 38 Tire Size ......................................................... 66
Programming Options via V.I.P.™ .................. 102 Torque Limit Ramp-Up Time ........................... 70
Programming the Product Software File ........ 147 Torque Limit with PTO .................................... 70
Programming the Reprogramming Traction Loss Threshold ................................. 109
Data File ...................................................... 147 Transmission Temperature ............................ 74
PTO Transmission Top Gear Ratio ........................ 66
Accel Bump Speed .................................. 91 U
Accel Ramp Rate ..................................... 92 Unit ID Number ............................................... 66
Autoset ..................................................... 91 Unit Pump Calibration ..................................... 65
Decel Bump Speed .................................. 92 Uploading the Verification File ........................ 148
Decel Ramp Rate .................................... 92 Using the F3 Update Options Screen ............. 147
Driveshaft PTO 2 Option........................... 79 Utilities............................................................. 66
Dropout Above Maximum Speed ............. 91
Engagement/Dropout Requirements ....... 93 V
Engine Speed Limit .................................. 90 Vehicle Data Log
Hold to Minimum Speed .......................... 91 Resetting the Vehicle Data Log ............... 39
Hold to Nearest ........................................ 92 Saving the Vehicle Data Log ................... 39
Jump to Minimum Speed ......................... 91 Viewing the Vehicle Data Log .................. 42
Max Road Speed Dropout ....................... 89 Vehicle Display Type ...................................... 100
Max Set Speed ........................................ 89 Vehicle Overspeed Logging with Fuel ............ 108
Min Set Speed ......................................... 89 Vehicle Overspeed Logging, All Conditions ... 108
Preset Speed ........................................... 90 View Current Parameters ............................... 65
Ramp Rate ............................................... 90 Viewing Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 41
Road Speed Limit ..................................... 90 Viewing Configuration Information ................. 41
Single Speed Control (SSC) .................... 89 Viewing Programming Histories ..................... 41
% Mechanic Power Limit .......................... 99 Viewing the Switch Status Display .................. 42

R W
Re-Entering Customer Passwords ................. 145 Wiggle Wire Test ............................................. 43
Removing Fuses ............................................ 145 Write Report at Next Trip/Trip Reset .............. 110
Request Driver Name at Every Startup? ........ 106 Write Report Once per Day ............................ 109
Reset DataMax via V.I.P.™ ............................ 100 Write Report When Key Turned ON ............... 109
Reset Driver Trip via V.I.P.™ ......................... 101

Page 170

You might also like